Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Citrix Access Gateway 9.1, Enterprise Edition

Copyright and Trademark Notice Use of the product documented in this guide is subject to your prior acceptance of the End User License Agreement. A printable copy of the End User License Agreement is included with the installation media. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Citrix Systems, Inc. 2009 Citrix Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Citrix and ICA (Independent Computing Architecture) are registered trademarks and Citrix Access Gateway is a trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Document Code: September 3, 2009 (KKW)

C ONTENTS

Contents

Chapter 1

Welcome
How to Use this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Getting Service and Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Additional Maintenance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Subscription Advantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Knowledge Center Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Education and Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Chapter 2

Introducing Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition

New Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Access Gateway Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 How the Access Gateway Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Hardware Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Access Gateway MPX 5500 Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Access Gateway Model 7000 Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Access Gateway Model 9000 Appliance with FIPS Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Access Gateway Model 9010 Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Access Gateway Model 10010 Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Chapter 3

Planning Your Deployment

Planning for Security with the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Configuring Secure Certificate Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Configuring Authentication Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Deploying the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Deploying the Access Gateway in the Network DMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Installing the Access Gateway in the DMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Access Gateway Connectivity in the DMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Deploying the Access Gateway in a Secure Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Access Gateway Connectivity in a Secure Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Deploying the Access Gateway to Access Published Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Deploying the Access Gateway in the DMZ with a Server Farm . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Deploying the Access Gateway in a Double-Hop DMZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

Identifying Access Gateway Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using the Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Configuring the Access Gateway Using Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 How the Setup Wizard Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 How the Access Gateway Wizard Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 How the Published Applications Wizard Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Installing the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Getting Ready to Install the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Installing the Access Gateway MPX 5500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Installing the Access Gateway Model 7000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Installing the Access Gateway Model 9010 or 10010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Configuring Settings Using the Serial Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Configuring Settings Using the Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Configuring TCP/IP Settings Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Configuring Settings Using the Access Gateway Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Configuring Auto Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Configuring the Host Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Defining the Fully-Qualified Domain Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Installing Licenses on the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 What the Platform License Is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 What the Universal License Is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Configuring Settings with the Access Gateway Policy Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Creating Additional Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Configuring IPv6 for Client Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Configuring IP Addresses on the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Changing the Mapped IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Configuring Subnet IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 How the Access Gateway Uses IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Configuring Routing on the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Configuring a Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Testing Your Access Gateway Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Configuring Name Service Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Contents

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

How High Availability Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Gathering Information for High Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Configuring the Access Gateway for High Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Adding a High Availability Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Adding an RPC Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Configuring the Primary and Secondary Appliances for High Availability . . .65 Disabling Access Gateway Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Customizing Your High Availability Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Synchronizing Access Gateway Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Enabling and Disabling Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Enabling High Availability Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Disabling Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Troubleshooting Command Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Forcing the Primary Access Gateway to Stay Primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Forcing the Secondary Appliance to Stay Secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Forcing Failover between Access Gateway Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Forcing Failover on the Primary Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Forcing Failover on the Secondary Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Forcing Failover in Listen Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Configuring the Virtual MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Configuring the Virtual MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Deleting a Virtual MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Binding and Unbinding a Virtual MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Configuring High Availability Pairs over Routed Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 How Independent Network Configuration Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Configuring an Independent Network Computing High Availability Pair . . . .76 Configuring Route Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Configuring Link Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Chapter 6

Installing and Managing Certificates

Installing Certificates on the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Creating a Private Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Creating a Certificate Signing Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Installing the Signed Certificate on the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Unbinding Test Certificates from the Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Configuring Intermediate Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Importing an Existing Certificate to the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

How Policies Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Setting Priorities of Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Configuring Conditional Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Configuring System Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Configuring Client Security Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Creating Simple Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Creating Compound Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding Custom Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Creating Policies on the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 How Session Policies Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Creating a Session Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Binding Session Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 How a Traffic Policy Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Creating a Traffic Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Binding a Traffic Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Removing Traffic Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Allowing File Type Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Creating a Web Interface Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Configuring the Access Gateway for File Type Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Configuring Citrix XenApp for File Type Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 How TCP Compression Policies Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating a TCP Compression Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Monitoring TCP Compression on Client Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

Configuring Authentication on the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Authentication Types Supported on the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Configuring Authentication without Authorization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Configuring Local Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Configuring Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Adding Users to Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Configuring Session Policies with Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 How Authentication Policies Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Configuring Authentication Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Binding Authentication Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Setting Priorities for Authentication Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Configuring LDAP Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Determining Attributes in your LDAP Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Contents

Configuring RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Choosing RADIUS Authentication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Configuring IP Address Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Configuring the Access Gateway to Use One-Time Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Configuring RSA SecurID Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Configuring Password Return with RADIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Configuring SafeWord Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Configuring Gemalto Protiva Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Configuring NTLM Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Configuring TACACS+ Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Configuring Client Certificate Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Configuring a Client Certificate as a Secondary Method of Authentication . .136 Configuring a Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Configuring a Common Access Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Configuring Multifactor Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Setting Priorities for Authentication Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Configuring Double-Source Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Disabling Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Configuring the Number of User Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Configuring the Global User Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Configuring Authentication for Specific Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Configuring Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Setting Default Global Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Configuring Authorization Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Setting the Priority for Authorization Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Configuring LDAP Group Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Group Memberships from Group Objects Working Evaluations . . . . . . . . . .148 Group Memberships from Group Objects Non-Working Evaluations . . . . . .148 LDAP Group Attribute Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Configuring LDAP Nested Group Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Configuring RADIUS Group Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Configuring LDAP Group Extraction for Multiple Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Creating Session Policies for Group Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Creating LDAP Authentication Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Creating Groups and Binding Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

Choosing the Client Access Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Configuring Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 How Users Connect to a Server Farm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Installing the Access Gateway Plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Deploying the Access Gateway Plug-in from Active Directory . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Monitoring and Ending User Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Configuring Access to Published Applications Using the Access Gateway Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 How the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Using the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Selecting the Plug-in Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Connecting Using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 How Clientless Access Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Enabling Clientless Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 How Clientless Access Policies Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Configuring Domain Access for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Configuring Clientless Access for SharePoint 2003 and SharePoint 2007. . . 179 Configuring the Client Choices Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Showing the Client Choices Page at Logon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Configuring Client Choices Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Configuring Access Scenario Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Using the Repeater Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 How SmartAccess Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

How User Connections Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Establishing the Secure Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Tunneling Private Network Traffic over Secure Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Terminating the Secure Tunnel and Returning Packets to the Client . . . . . . . 196 Supporting the Access Gateway Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Connecting to Internal Network Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Enabling Proxy Support for Client Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Configuring Time-Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Configuring Single Sign-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Configuring Single Sign-On with Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Configuring Single Sign-On to Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Configuring Single Sign-On to a Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Configuring Client Interception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Configuring Intranet Applications for the Access Gateway Plug-in. . . . . . . . 206 Configuring Intranet Applications for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java. 208 Configuring IP Pooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Defining the IP Pooling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Contents

Configuring Split Tunneling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Configuring Split Tunneling and Authorization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Configuring Name Service Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Supporting Voice over IP Phones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Configuring Application Access for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java . . . . .217 Accessing Applications using the HOSTS File Modification Method . . . . . .217 Accessing Applications Using the SourceIP and SourcePort Method. . . . . . .218

Chapter 11

Configuring the Access Interface

Enabling the Access Interface or Customized Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Changing the Access Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Creating and Applying Web and File Share Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

How Endpoint Policies Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 System Requirements for Endpoint Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Evaluating Client Logon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Configuring Preauthentication Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Configuring Preauthentication Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Configuring Endpoint Analysis Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Binding Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Setting the Priority of Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Unbinding and Removing Preauthentication Polices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Configuring Post-Authentication Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Configuring a Post-Authentication Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Configuring the Frequency to Run a Post-Authentication Policy . . . . . . . . . .234 Configuring Quarantine and Authorization Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Configuring Client Security Preauthentication Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Configuring Antivirus, Firewall, Internet Security or Antispam Expressions.238 Configuring Service Policies for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Configuring Process Policies for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Configuring Operating System Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Configuring File Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Configuring Registry Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Configuring Compound Client Security Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Configuring Policies with the AND (&&) Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Configuring Policies with the OR ( || ) Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Configuring Policies Using the NOT ( ! ) Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

10

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

Upgrading the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Configuring Delegated Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Configuring Command Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Viewing Access Gateway Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Saving the Configuration to Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Viewing the Saved Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Viewing the Current Running Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Comparing the Saved and Running Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Clearing the Access Gateway Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Managing User Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Configuring Auditing on the Access Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Configuring Logs on the Access Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

Securing Connections with Digital Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Introduction to Security Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Introduction to Cryptography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Digital Certificates and Certificate Authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Getting Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Getting Server Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Using Windows Certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Unencrypting the Private Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Requiring Certificates for Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Using Wildcard Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Configuring FIPS 140-2 on the Model 9000 FIPS Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 How FIPS 140-2 Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Configuring the Hardware Security Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Creating Private Keys for FIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Exporting FIPS 140-2 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Importing FIPS 140-2 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Importing External Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Configuring High Availability with FIPS 140-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Appendix B

Advanced Concepts
Configuring DNS Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Resolving DNS Name Servers Located in the Secure Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Using Operators and Operands in Policy Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Configuring Server-Initiated Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

11

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Enabling Access Gateway Plug-in Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

12

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

C HAPTER 1

Welcome

This chapter describes who should read the Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide, how it is organized, and its document conventions.

How to Use this Guide

This guide is intended for system administrators responsible for installing and configuring the Access Gateway. This document assumes that the Access Gateway is connected to an existing network and that the administrator has experience configuring that network The configuration steps in this document assume that the Access Gateway is deployed as a standalone appliance and that users connect directly to the Access Gateway.

Document Conventions
Access Gateway documentation uses the following typographic conventions for menus, commands, keyboard keys, and items in the program interface:
Convention Boldface Italics Meaning Commands, names of interface items such as text boxes, option buttons, and user input. Placeholders for information or parameters that you provide. For example, filename in a procedure means you type the actual name of a file. Italics also are used for new terms and the titles of books. The Windows system directory, which can be WTSRV, WINNT, WINDOWS, or other name you specify when you install Windows. Text displayed in a text file or command-line interface. A series of items, one of which is required in command statements. For example, { yes | no } means you must type yes or no. Do not type the braces themselves.

%SystemRoot% Monospace { braces }

14

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Convention [ brackets ]

Meaning Optional items in command statements. For example, [/ping] means that you can type /ping with the command. Do not type the brackets themselves. A separator between items in braces or brackets in command statements. For example, { /hold | /release | /delete } means you type /hold or /release or /delete. You can repeat the previous item or items in command statements. For example, /route:devicename[,] means you can type additional devicenames separated by commas.

| (vertical bar)

(ellipsis)

Getting Service and Support

Citrix provides technical support primarily through the Citrix Solutions Network (CSN). Our CSN partners are trained and authorized to provide a high level of support to our customers. Contact your supplier for first-line support, or check for your nearest CSN partner at [Link] In addition to the CSN channel program, Citrix offers a variety of self-service, Web-based technical support tools from its Knowledge Center at [Link] Knowledge Center features include: A knowledge base containing thousands of technical solutions to support your Citrix environment An online product documentation library Interactive support forums for every Citrix product Access to the latest hotfixes and service packs Security bulletins Online problem reporting and tracking (for organizations with valid support contracts)

Another source of support, Citrix Preferred Support Services, provides a range of options that allows you to customize the level and type of support for your organizations Citrix products.

Additional Maintenance Support

In addition to the support options provided by Citrix, all Access Gateway Enterprise Edition appliances are available with Silver and Gold maintenance options. If you purchased either of these options, documentation is provided with the appropriate Citrix Technical Support numbers if you need to call.

Chapter 1

Welcome

15

Silver Maintenance Option

The Silver maintenance option provides unlimited Access Gateway support for one year. This option provides basic coverage hours, one assigned support account manager for non-technical relations management, four named contacts, and advanced replacement for materials. Technical support is available at the following times: North America, Latin America, and the Caribbean: 8 a.m. to 9 p.m. US Eastern time, Monday through Friday Asia (excluding Japan): 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. Hong Kong time, Monday through Friday Australia and New Zealand: 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. Australian Eastern Standard Time (AEST), Monday through Friday Europe, Middle East, and Africa: 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. Coordinated Universal Time (Greenwich Mean Time), Monday through Friday

Gold Maintenance Option

The Gold maintenance option provides unlimited Access Gateway support for one year. Support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. This option provides assigned support account manager for non-technical relations management and six named contacts.

Subscription Advantage
Your product includes a one-year membership in the Citrix Subscription Advantage program. The Subscription Advantage program gives you an easy way to stay current with the latest software version and information for your Citrix products. Not only do you get automatic access to download the latest feature releases, software upgrades, and enhancements that become available during the term of your membership, you also get priority access to important Citrix technology information. You can find more information on the Citrix Web site at [Link] (select Subscription Advantage). You can also contact your sales representative, Citrix Customer Care, or a member of the Citrix Solutions Network program for more information.

Knowledge Center Alerts

The Citrix Knowledge Center allows you to configure alerts, which notify you when the topic you are interested in is updated. You can set an alert on product categories. When there are updates to the product, you are notified of the update.

16

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

To set up an alert, log on to the Citrix Support Web site at [Link] After you are logged on, under Products, select a product. Under Tools, click Add to your Hotfix Alerts. To remove an alert, go to the Knowledge Center product and click Remove from your Hotfix Alerts.

Education and Training

Citrix offers a variety of instructor-led training and Web-based training solutions. Instructor-led courses are offered through Citrix Authorized Learning Centers (CALCs). CALCs provide high-quality classroom learning using professional courseware developed by Citrix. Many of these courses lead to certification. Web-based training courses are available through CALCs, resellers, and from the Citrix Web site. Information about programs and courseware for Citrix training and certification is available from [Link]

Related Documentation
For additional information about the Access Gateway, refer to the following guides: Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Pre-Installation Checklist Citrix Web Interface Administrators Guide Secure Gateway to Access Gateway Migration Guide Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Readme

C HAPTER 2

Introducing Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition

The Access Gateway is a network appliance that securely delivers any application with policy-based SmartAccess control anywhere. Users can obtain easy-touse secure access to all of the enterprise applications and data they need to be productive. IT organizations can cost-effectively extend access to applications outside the data center while maintaining strict control through SmartAccess application-level policies. IT organizations are empowered to cost-effectively meet the demands of all workers, deliver flexible working options, and implement business continuity while ensuring the highest-level of information security and reducing support calls. Access Gateway Enterprise Edition offers the following benefits: Remote access for the most demanding and complex environments that require increased scalability and/or performance High availability for uninterrupted access to critical applications and resources Tightest level of integration and control of remotely delivered Citrix XenApp applications, data through SmartAccess and published desktops with XenDesktop Natural replacement for existing Citrix XenApp customers who use the Secure Gateway Enterprise-class SSL VPN features including client-side cache clean-up, detailed auditing, and policy-based access control for Web and server applications Remote users can work with files on shared network drives, access email and intranet sites, and run applications just as if they are working inside of your organizations firewall Certified to meet government and commercial security standards such as Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2 and ICSA

18

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Supports the Access Gateway universal license (included in Citrix XenApp Platinum Edition, Citrix XenDesktop Platinum Edition and Citrix NetScaler Platinum Edition)

New Features
This release of the Access Gateway includes the following new features: Support for Nested LDAP Group Extraction. If users belong to more than one group on the LDAP server, the Access Gateway extracts user information from each LDAP group. Support for the MPX 5500 Appliance. Access Gateway 9.1 Classic is supported on the new MPX 5500 appliance. Support for Imprivata OneSign. The Access Gateway support single sign-on using one-time passwords provided by Imprivata OneSign single sign-on. Users logon using the passcode provided by Imprivata and then the Imprivata server returns the Windows password to the Access Gateway. Support for Session Identifiers. The log signature Context is replaced with a SessionID. This allows you to track logs per session rather than per user. Logs that are generated as part of a session have the same SessionID. If a user establishes two sessions from the same client device with the same IP address, each session has a unique SessionID. Support for Citrix Receiver. Access Gateway Enterprise Edition supports Citrix Receiver and Citrix Merchandising Server, which are components of the Citrix Delivery Center. Citrix Merchandising Server and Citrix Receiver streamline the installation and management of application delivery to user desktops. Citrix Receiver and Citrix Merchandising Server together provide two very important features. First, the Merchandising Server allows you to configure, deliver, and upgrade plug-ins on your clients devices. Citrix Receiver manages all the operations for Citrix plugins on client devices. The orchestrated system consists of the Citrix Receiver for Windows application that is installed on client devices, the Merchandising Server that is installed on a virtual machine in your data center, and the Citrix Update Service that is hosted on [Link]. The Merchandising Server Administrator Console is the interface on the Merchandising Server that you use to configure Citrix applications (and application plug-ins) and schedule their delivery to client devices. The Merchandising Server broadcasts the plug-ins and their installation instructions to your users on the scheduled date. Your users simply install Receiver for Windows on their client devices. Once installed, Receiver for

Chapter 2

Introducing Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition

19

Windows gets the delivery information from the Merchandising Server and installs the plug-ins. After installation is complete, Receiver for Windows starts its plug-ins in the correct order ensuring that connectivity services are available for plug-ins that require it. For more information, see the Citrix Merchandising Server Administrator's Guide or the Citrix Receiver for Windows User's Guide.

Terminology Changes
Some of the terminology used to describe product components have changed. The following list contains updated terminology used in this document. There are several name changes you need to be aware of for client software and Citrix XenApp.:
From navigation page or home page Secure Access Citrix Presentation Server Citrix Presentation Server Clients Web Client Program Neighborhood Agent Endpoint Analysis Client WANScaler Client or Accelerator Plug-in To Access Interface Access Gateway Plug-in Citrix XenApp Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps Citrix XenApp Web Plug-in Citrix XenApp Plug-in Endpoint Analysis Plug-in Repeater Plug-in

Access Gateway Architecture

The core components of the Access Gateway are: Virtual servers. The Access Gateway virtual server is an internal entity that is a representative of all the configured services available to clients. The virtual server is also the access point through which clients access these services. Multiple virtual servers can be configured on a single appliance, allowing one Access Gateway appliance to serve multiple user communities with differing authentication and resource access requirements. Authentication, authorization, and accounting. Authentication, authorization, and accounting can be configured to allow users to log on to the Access Gateway with credentials that are recognized by either the

20

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Access Gateway or by authentication servers located in the secure network, such as LDAP or RADIUS. Authorization policies define user permissions, determining which resources a given user is authorized to access. For more information about authentication and authorization, see Configuring Authentication and Authorization on page 111. For more information about accounting, see Configuring Auditing on the Access Gateway on page 257. The Access Gateway uses policies to manage this information. Accounting servers maintain data about Access Gateway activity, including user logon events, resource access instances, and operational errors. This information is stored on the Access Gateway or on an external server. Client connections. Users can log on to the Access Gateway using the following access methods: The Access Gateway Plug-in is client software that is downloaded to the client device. Users log on by right-clicking an icon in the notification area on a Windows computer. Users can add an icon to the desktop that they can click to log on. If users are using a computer where the Access Gateway Plug-in is not installed, they can log on using a Web browser to download and install the plug-in. The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX is a version of client software that users can use only through Internet Explorer. The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX works only on Windows XP. The Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, which enables Mac OS X, Linux, and optionally, Windows users to log on using a Web browser. Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps allow connections to published applications in a server farm. Clientless access that provides users with the access they need without installing client software When configuring the Access Gateway, you can configure how users log on using policies. You can also restrict user logon with session and endpoint analysis policies. Network resources. These include all network services to be accessed using the Access Gateway, such as file servers, applications, and Web sites.

Chapter 2

Introducing Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition

21

How the Access Gateway Works

A user connects to the Access Gateway by typing the Web address in the browser. The user is presented with the logon page where the user name and password are entered. If external authentication servers are configured, the Access Gateway contacts the server and the authentication servers verify the users credentials. If local authentication is configured, user authentication is performed by the Access Gateway. When the user is successfully authenticated, the Access Gateway tunnel is initiated. The user is now prompted by the Access Gateway to permit the appropriate client software to be downloaded and installed. If you are using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, the client is also initialized with a list of preconfigured resource IP addresses and port numbers. When the user types the Access Gateway Web address, the Access Gateway checks to see if there are any client-based security policies in place. This is called a pre-authentication policy. If there are, it checks for the specified condition on the client device. These are generally security checks that verify that the client device has the necessary security-related operating system updates, antivirus protection, and perhaps a properly configured firewall. If the client device fails the security check, the Access Gateway blocks the user from logging on. A user unable to log on needs to download the necessary updates or packages and install them on the client device. After a user successfully logs on, the client device can be scanned for the required client security policies. This is called a post-authentication scan. If the client device fails the scan, either the policy is not applied or the user is placed in a quarantine group. Configuring preauthentication and post-authentication policies are optional. When the session is established, users are directed to an Access Gateway home page where they can select resources to access. The home page that is included with the Access Gateway is called the Access Interface. If the users log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows, an icon in the notification area on Windows shows that it is connected and users receive a message that the connection is established. If the clients request passes both checks, the Access Gateway then contacts the requested resource and initiates a secure connection between the client and that resource. The client can close an active session by right-clicking the Access Gateway icon in the notification area and then clicking Logoff. The session can also time out due to inactivity. When the session is closed, the tunnel is shut down and the client no longer has access to internal resources.

22

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Hardware Platforms
Access Gateway Enterprise Edition is available on the following hardware platforms: Access Gateway MPX 5500 appliance Access Gateway Model 7000 appliance Access Gateway Model 9000 series appliance Access Gateway Model 10010 appliance

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition is available as an optional feature on all versions of Citrix NetScaler. The following table shows which Access Gateway software versions are supported on the appliance:
Access Gateway Version 8.0 8.1 9.0 9.1 Classic 9.1 nCore MPX 5500 No Yes (1) No (2) Yes No (3) 7000 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 9000/9010 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 10010 Yew Yes Yes Yes No

(1) The MPX 5500 is supported on Version 8.1, build 65 or later. (2) Warning: Installing Version 9.0, build 68 or earlier on the MPX 5500 results in a boot failure. (3) Support for Version 9.1 nCore on the MPX 5500 is expected at a later date.

Access Gateway MPX 5500 Appliance

The Access Gateway MPX 5500 supports up to 5,000 concurrent users per appliance. The appliance has the following ports: Four 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet network interfaces Two 10/100/1000 Base-T management interfaces One serial port Four 1 gigabyte (GB) network interfaces (copper)

Chapter 2

Introducing Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition

23

Two 1 GB management interfaces LCD display with keypad

Access Gateway Model 7000 Appliance

The Access Gateway Model 7000 supports 2,500 concurrent users per appliance. The appliance has the following ports: Six 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network interfaces Two 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet network interfaces One serial port

Access Gateway Model 9000 Appliance with FIPS Option

The Access Gateway Model 9000 supports 5,000 concurrent users per appliance. This version of the Access Gateway includes the Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2, level 2-validated hardware security module. The appliance has the following ports: Four 1000-Base-SX or four 10/100/1000 Base-T copper Ethernet network interfaces One 10/100/1000 Base-T network Ethernet network interface One serial port

Access Gateway Model 9010 Appliance

The Access Gateway Model 9010 supports 5,000 concurrent users per appliance. It has the same Ethernet network interfaces as the Model 9000 appliance.

Access Gateway Model 10010 Appliance

The Access Gateway Model 10010 supports 10,000 concurrent users per appliance. It has the same Ethernet network interfaces as the Model 9010 appliance. You can use the serial port on each appliance to connect a computer directly to the appliance using a serial cable to access the appliance command-line interface.

24

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

C HAPTER 3

Planning Your Deployment

This chapter discusses deployment scenarios for the Access Gateway. You can deploy the Access Gateway at the perimeter of your organizations internal network to provide a secure single point-of-access to the servers, applications, and other network resources residing in the internal network. All remote users must connect to the Access Gateway before they can access any resources on the internal network. In This Chapter Planning for Security with the Access Gateway Deploying the Access Gateway in the Network DMZ Deploying the Access Gateway in a Secure Network Deploying the Access Gateway to Access Published Applications Deploying the Access Gateway in a Double-Hop DMZ

Planning for Security with the Access Gateway

When planning your Access Gateway deployment, consider how you are going to secure user connections. Security considerations include the types of certificates you need and the authentication type for user logon.

Configuring Secure Certificate Management

Before you deploy the Access Gateway in a production environment, Citrix recommends that you request and receive a signed SSL server certificate from a known Certificate Authority (CA) and upload it to the Access Gateway. If you deploy the Access Gateway in any environment where the Access Gateway must operate as the client in an SSL handshake (initiate encrypted connections with another server), you must also install a trusted root certificate on the Access Gateway.

26

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

For example, if you deploy the Access Gateway with Citrix XenApp and the Web Interface, you can encrypt connections from the Access Gateway to the Web Interface with SSL. In this configuration, you must install a trusted root certificate on the Access Gateway. For more information, see Installing Certificates on the Access Gateway on page 80 and Securing Connections with Digital Certificates on page 263.

Configuring Authentication Support

You can configure the Access Gateway to authenticate users and control the level of access (or authorization) that users have to the network resources on the internal network. Before deploying the Access Gateway, have your directories and authentication servers in place to support one of these authentication types: LDAP RADIUS RSA SecurID (using RADIUS) NTLM SafeWord products (using RADIUS) Smart card using client certificates for authentication TACACS+

If your environment supports none of the authentication types listed above or you have a small population of remote users, you can create a list of local users on the Access Gateway and configure the Access Gateway to authenticate users against this local list. With this configuration, it is not necessary to maintain user accounts in a separate, external directory. For more information about authentication and authorization, see Configuring Authentication and Authorization on page 111.

Deploying the Access Gateway

This section discusses the following Access Gateway deployments: Deploying the Access Gateway in the network demilitarized zone (DMZ) Deploying the Access Gateway in a secure network that does not have a DMZ

Chapter 3

Planning Your Deployment

27

Deploying additional Access Gateway appliances to support load balancing and failover

Deploying the Access Gateway in the Network DMZ

Many organizations protect their internal network with a DMZ. A DMZ is a subnet that lies between an organizations secure internal network and the Internet (or any external network). When the Access Gateway is deployed in the DMZ, users access it using the Access Gateway Plug-in or Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps.

Access Gateway deployed in the DMZ

Installing the Access Gateway in the DMZ

In this configuration, you install the Access Gateway in the DMZ and configure it to connect to both the Internet and the internal network. Follow the instructions in Installing the Access Gateway on page 38 to perform installation and configuration.

Access Gateway Connectivity in the DMZ

When you deploy the Access Gateway in the DMZ, client connections must traverse the first firewall to connect to the Access Gateway. By default, clients use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) on port 443 to establish this connection. To support this connectivity, you must allow SSL on port 443 through the first firewall.

28

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The Access Gateway decrypts the SSL connections from the client and establishes a connection on behalf of the client to the network resources behind the second firewall. The ports that must be open through the second firewall are dependent on the network resources that you authorize external users to access. For example, if you authorize external users to access a Web server in the internal network and this server listens for HTTP connections on port 80, you must allow HTTP on port 80 through the second firewall.

Deploying the Access Gateway in a Secure Network

You can install the Access Gateway in the secure network. In this scenario, there is typically one firewall between the Internet and the secure network. The Access Gateway resides inside the firewall to control access to network resources.

Access Gateway deployed in a secure network

Access Gateway Connectivity in a Secure Network

When an Access Gateway is deployed in the secure network, the Access Gateway Plug-in connection must traverse the firewall to connect to the Access Gateway. By default, both of these clients use the SSL protocol on port 443 to establish the connection. To support this connectivity, you must open port 443 on the firewall.

Chapter 3

Planning Your Deployment

29

Deploying the Access Gateway to Access Published Applications

When you deploy the Access Gateway to provide secure remote access to a server farm, the Access Gateway works with the Web Interface and the Secure Ticket Authority (STA) to provide access to published applications and resources hosted within a server farm. This section covers the basic aspects of deploying the Access Gateway with a server farm. For a detailed discussion of this deployment, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop. The configuration of your organizations network determines where you deploy the Access Gateway when it operates with a server farm. There are two options: If your organization protects the internal network with a single DMZ, deploy the Access Gateway in the DMZ. If your organization protects the internal network with two DMZs , deploy one Access Gateway in each of the two network segments in a double-hop DMZ configuration. For more information about deploying the Access Gateway in a double-hop DMZ, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop. Note: You can also configure a double-hop DMZ with the second Access Gateway appliance in the secure network.

Deploying the Access Gateway in the DMZ with a Server Farm

Deploying the Access Gateway in the DMZ is the most common configuration when the Access Gateway operates with a server farm. In this configuration, the Access Gateway provides a secure single point-ofaccess for the Web browsers and Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps that access the published resources through the Web Interface.

30

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Access Gateway and Web Interface deployed in the DMZ. Computers in the secure network are running Citrix XenApp. When the Access Gateway is deployed in the DMZ to provide remote access to a server farm, you can implement one of the following three deployment possibilities: Deploy the Web Interface behind the Access Gateway in the DMZ. In this configuration, both the Access Gateway and the Web Interface are deployed in the DMZ. The initial client connection goes to the Access Gateway and is then redirected to the Web Interface. Deploy the Access Gateway parallel to the Web Interface in the DMZ. In this configuration, both the Access Gateway and the Web Interface are deployed in the DMZ, but the initial client connection goes to the Web Interface instead of the Access Gateway. The Web Interface interacts with the Secure Ticket Authority (STA) and generates an ICA file to ensure the XenApp plug-in traffic is routed through the Access Gateway to a computer running XenApp in the server farm. Deploy the Access Gateway in the DMZ and deploy the Web Interface in the internal network. In this configuration, user requests are authenticated by the Access Gateway before they are relayed to the Web Interface in the secure network. The Web Interface does not perform authentication, but interacts with the STA and generates an ICA file to ensure ICA traffic is routed through the Access Gateway to the server farm.

For more information about deploying the Web Interface behind or parallel to the Access Gateway, see the Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.

Chapter 3

Planning Your Deployment

31

Deploying the Access Gateway in a Double-Hop DMZ

Some organizations use three firewalls to protect their internal networks. The three firewalls divide the DMZ into two stages to provide an extra layer of security for the internal network. This network configuration is called a doublehop DMZ. You can deploy the Access Gateway in a double-hop DMZ configuration to provide a single point of access to a server farm residing in an internal network. With this configuration, you must deploy two Access Gateway appliances: one in the first stage of the DMZ and one in the second stage of the DMZ. Important: When the Access Gateway is deployed in a double-hop scenario, clients can access resources only in a server farm using Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps. Users cannot use the Access Gateway Plug-in to access internal network resources in a double-hop DMZ scenario. Only ICA traffic is supported.

Two Access Gateway appliances deployed in a double-hop DMZ The figure above shows two Access Gateway appliances deployed in a doublehop DMZ to control access to a server farm. You can also deploy one Access Gateway in the DMZ and the second Access Gateway in the secure network. When you deploy a double-hop scenario in this manner, you can simplify your firewall rules. In this deployment, the clients, the Access Gateway appliances, and the Web Interface perform these operations: Users from the Internet use a Web browser and Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps to connect to the Access Gateway in the first DMZ. The Access Gateway in the first DMZ receives the client connections and redirects these connections to the Web Interface in the second DMZ. This

32

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Access Gateway also handles connections from the clients that connect to the server farm on the internal network. The Web Interface performs various interactions with the Web browser clients and components of the server, including the XML Service and the Secure Ticket Authority (STA). These interactions provide users with a list of published applications and enable the user to access a published application by clicking a link in this list. Important: The Web Interface must be installed parallel to the Access Gateway in the second DMZ. The Access Gateway in the second DMZ acts as a proxy that enables ICA traffic to traverse the second DMZ and connect to the server farm in the internal network. The Access Gateway in the second DMZ also enables the Access Gateway in the first DMZ to communicate with the STA in the internal network.

Alternatively, you can deploy a double-hop scenario with one appliance in the DMZ and the second appliance in the secure network. For detailed information about these interactions and the configurations required to deploy two Access Gateway appliances in a double-hop DMZ configuration, see the Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.

C HAPTER 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

The Access Gateway installs in any network infrastructure without requiring changes to the existing hardware or internal network. It works with other networking products, such as server load balancers, firewalls, routers, and IEEE 802.11 wireless devices. Citrix recommends installing the Access Gateway in the demilitarized zone (DMZ). When installed in the DMZ, the Access Gateway participates on two networks: a private network and a public network with a publicly routable IP address. Typically, the private network is the internal enterprise network and the public one is the Internet. You can also use the Access Gateway to partition local area networks internally in the organization for access control and security. In This Chapter Identifying Access Gateway Prerequisites Using the Configuration Utility Configuring the Access Gateway Using Wizards Installing the Access Gateway Configuring Settings Using the Serial Console Configuring Settings Using the Configuration Utility Configuring the Host Name Installing Licenses on the Access Gateway Creating Additional Virtual Servers Configuring IP Addresses on the Access Gateway Configuring Routing on the Access Gateway Testing Your Access Gateway Configuration Configuring Name Service Providers

34

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Identifying Access Gateway Prerequisites

Before you start to configure settings on the Access Gateway, review the prerequisites needed for a successful deployment. The Access Gateway is physically installed in your network and has access to the network. The Access Gateway is deployed in the demilitarized zone (DMZ) or internal network behind a firewall. You can also configure the Access Gateway in a double-hop DMZ and for connections to a server farm. The Access Gateway needs to be configured with a default gateway or static routes to the internal network so users can access resources in the network. The Access Gateway is configured to use static routes by default. The external servers used for authentication and authorization are configured and running. For more information, see Configuring Authentication and Authorization on page 111. The network has a DNS or WINS server for name resolution to provide correct Access Gateway user connection functionality. The licenses for user connections are downloaded from My Citrix and ready to be installed on the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway has a certificate that is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). For more information, see Installing and Managing Certificates on page 79.

Using the Configuration Utility

The Access Gateway can be configured using the configuration utility. The configuration utility is comprised of the following components: Navigation Pane. The navigation tree extends down the left side of the screen, and provides a collapsible menu that contains links to all nodes in the configuration utility. To navigate to a node, click the plus (+) sign to expand that category. The plus sign changes to a minus (-) sign and all nodes and categories within that node are displayed. At the bottom of the navigation pane are three links you can use to quickly navigate through the configuration utility. These include: Navigation Pane. This button takes you back to the navigation pane. Favorites. This button shows the nodes you have marked as favorites. You can use favorites to quickly go to the parts of the configuration utility you use the most.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

35

Quick Links. This is a list of commonly used wizards and policy managers on the appliance. You can use this button to quickly navigate to the task you want to complete.

Details Pane. The details pane is the right portion of the configuration utility displays tasks and entities of the corresponding node in the navigation pane. Configuration Buttons. These are located at the bottom of the details pane. The buttons change depending on that path you opened in the navigation pane. Other Links. The following are description for some of the links: Settings. When you click this link, your settings are saved to your computer. Save. This saves the configuration on the Access Gateway. Refresh All. When ever you do any operation in the configuration utility, the configuration utility checks whether the configuration is same as on the kernel. This link helps you synchronize the latest configuration changes. Help. This links opens the online help for the configuration utility. Refresh. This button helps you to reflect the latest data. Add to Favorites. This button allows you to save the current details pane to a favorites list on the Access Gateway. You can access your favorites by clicking Favorites at the bottom of the navigation pane.

36

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuration utility

Configuring the Access Gateway Using Wizards

The Access Gateway has three wizards to configure settings on the appliance. These include: The Setup Wizard The Access Gateway wizard The Published Applications wizard

How the Setup Wizard Works

The Setup Wizard is used to configure the initial settings on the appliance. The Setup Wizard configures the following settings: System IP address and subnet mask Mapped IP address and subnet mask

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

37

Host name Default gateway Administrator password Licenses

Note: Before running the Setup Wizard, download your licenses from the Citrix Web site. For more information, see Installing Licenses on the Access Gateway on page 47.

How the Access Gateway Wizard Works

The Access Gateway wizard helps you quickly configure additional settings on the appliance. These are settings that configure how users connect to the Access Gateway. The settings include: Virtual servers Certificates Name service providers Authentication Authorization Port redirection Clientless access Clientless access for SharePoint

How the Published Applications Wizard Works

The Published Applications Wizard helps you to configure the Access Gateway to connect to servers running Citrix XenApp or Citrix XenDesktop in the internal network. With the Published Applications Wizard, you can: Select a virtual server for connections to the server farm Configure the settings for client connections for the Web Interface, single sign-on, and Secure Ticket Authority Configure Web Interface failover Create or select session policies for SmartAccess

38

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Within the wizard, you can also create session policy expressions for client connections. For more information about configuring the Access Gateway to connect to a server farm, see the Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.

Installing the Access Gateway

This section describes how to install the Access Gateway in your network. To install the appliance successfully, use the following guidelines: Plan your deployment. Before you deploy the appliance, you need to determine if the appliance is going to provide access to resources on single or multiple networks, and then choose the installation type you want. Install your appliance. Install the appliance on your network.

Getting Ready to Install the Access Gateway

To install the Access Gateway, verify that the contents of the box match the packing list. If an item on the packing list is missing from the box, contact Citrix Customer Care. Before starting the installation, complete the Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Pre-Installation Checklist to verify the settings you need to configure. These settings include IP addresses, virtual servers, and authentication.

Materials and Information Needed for Installation

The box that contains the appliance should have the following items: An Access Gateway appliance The accessory kit that includes: One RJ-45-to-RJ-45 serial cable One RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapter Two RJ-45-to-DB-9 adapters

One AC power cable for the Model 7000 appliance Two AC power cables for the Model 9000 or 10000 series appliances Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Pre-Installation Checklist

When configuring the Access Gateway for the first time, identify the IP addresses you need to configure the appliance. These include:

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

39

The system IP address that the Access Gateway administrator uses to configure the appliance The mapped IP address that routes network traffic to servers in the secure network (required) The subnet IP address that is an optional IP address to a different subnet in your network The default gateway IP address The IP addresses for virtual servers to which users connect The community name and IP address of the management station for SNMP access (optional)

For additional information for the settings you need to configure, see the Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Pre-Installation Checklist. Caution: The flash disk cannot be changed when the appliance is powered on. Remove the flash disk only when the appliance is turned off.

Installing the Access Gateway MPX 5500

The tasks for installing the MPX 5500 appliance are: Installing the Access Gateway in a rack Connecting Ethernet cables to the appliance and network

Installing the MPX 5500 in a Rack

The Access Gateway ships with rack rail hardware. This hardware consists of two rear inner rails that are secured to the chassis, one on each side just behind the preinstalled front inner rails. These two rails are left- and right-specific. Both chassis rails have a locking tab, which serves two functions. The first is to lock the system into place when installed in the rack. The second is to lock the system in place when fully extended from the rack, preventing the appliance from coming out of the rack when pulled out for servicing. Note: You might need to remove the rack mount ears before installing the rack rails.

To install the rear inner rails

1.

The inner rails are secured to the front half of the chassis.

40

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3. 4.

Starting from the right side, align the two square holes on the rail against the hooks on the right side of the chassis. Attach the rail to the chassis with screws. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to install the left rear inner rail.

To install the rack rails

1. 2. 3. 4.

Determine where you want to place the appliance in the rack. Position the chassis rail guides at the desired location in the rack, keeping the sliding rail guide facing inwards. Screw the assembly to the rack using the brackets provided. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for attaching the assembly to the other side of the rack. Ensure that both the rack rails are at the same height and that the rail guides are facing inward.

To install the appliance into the rack

1. 2. 3. 4.

Line up the rear inner rails with the rack rails. Slide the chassis rails in the rack rails, keeping the pressure even on both sides. You may have to depress the locking tabs when inserting the chassis. When the system is pushed completely into the rack, you will hear the locking tabs click. Insert and tighten the thumbscrews to secure the front of the chassis to the rack.

Installing the Access Gateway MPX 5500

After installing the Access Gateway in the rack, connect the Access Gateway to your network.
To install the Access Gateway MPX 5500

1. 2.

Connect the Ethernet cables. Connect a computer to the serial console on the front of the appliance. The terminal emulation application must have a baud rate and character format configured to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

3.

Power on the Access Gateway.

Installing the Access Gateway Model 7000

The tasks for installing the Access Gateway Model 7000 are:

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

41

Installing the Access Gateway in the rack Connecting Ethernet cables to the appliance and network

Installing the Access Model 7000 in a Rack

Before connecting the Access Gateway to your network, install the appliance in a rack.
To install the Model 7000 in a rack

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Place the Access Gateway appliance in your server room rack, and secure it to the rack using the screws provided with the appliance. Position the appliance in the rack. Make sure that there is adequate ventilation. Verify that the screw holes are aligned with the corresponding holes on the rack. Insert two mounting screws on each side. Tighten the mounting screws.

Installing the Access Gateway Model 7000

After you install the Access Gateway appliance in the rack, connect the appliance to the network.
To connect the Model 7000 to the network

1. 2.

Connect the Ethernet cables. Connect a computer to the serial console on the front of the appliance. The terminal emulation application must have a baud rate and character format configured to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

3.

Power on the Access Gateway. Caution: Ensure that you do not create a network loop. This occurs if you connect any two cables to the same switch or virtual local area network (VLAN).

Installing the Access Gateway Model 9010 or 10010

The tasks for installing the Model 9010 or 10010 are:

42

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Installing the Access Gateway in a rack Installing Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) network ports Connecting Ethernet cables to the appliance and network

Rack Mounting the 9010 or 10010 Model

The Access Gateway ships with rack rail hardware. This hardware consists of two rear inner rails that are secured to the chassis, one on each side just behind the preinstalled front inner rails. These two rails are left- and right-specific. Both chassis rails have a locking tab, which serves two functions. The first is to lock the appliance into place when installed in the rack. The second is to lock the appliance in place when fully extended from the rack, preventing the appliance from coming out of the rack when pulled out for servicing. Note: You might need to remove the rack mount ears before installing the rack rails.

To install the rear inner rails

1. 2. 3.

Starting from the right side, align the two square holes on the rail against the hooks on the right side of the chassis. Attach the rail to the chassis with screws. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to install the left rear inner rail.

To install the rack rails

1. 2. 3. 4.

Determine where you want to place the system in the rack. Position the chassis rail guides at the desired location in the rack, keeping the sliding rail guide facing inward. Screw the assembly to the rack using the brackets provided. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for attaching the assembly to the other side of the rack. Ensure that both the rack rails are at same height and that the rail guides are facing inward.

To install the appliance in the rack

1. 2. 3.

Line up the rear inner rails with the rack rails. Slide the chassis rails into the rack rails keeping the pressure even on both sides. You may have to depress the locking tabs when inserting the chassis. When the system is pushed completely into the rack, you hear the locking tabs click.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

43

4.

Insert and tighten the thumbscrews to secure the front of the chassis to the rack.

Installing Small Form-Factor Pluggable Network Ports

If you purchase the Model 9010 Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) appliance, there are four SFP network ports. The Model 10010 appliance supports four SFP ports and four 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports. Two types of SFP come with the Access Gateway. One is copper and one is fiber. Caution: Only those SFPs provided by Citrix are supported. If you try to install a third-party SFP port on the Access Gateway, the warranty becomes void.

To install the copper SFP

1. 2. 3. 4.

Carefully remove the copper SFP module from the box. Insert the copper SFP in the socket with the locking hinge in the DOWN position. Push the copper SFP until it is in the locking position. Move the locking hinge to the UP position and push it inward into the socket.

Installing the fiber SFP

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Carefully remove the fiber SFP module from the box. Insert the fiber SFP in the socket with the locking hinge in the UP position. Push the fiber SFP until it is in the locking position. Move the locking hinge to the DOWN position. Remove the fiber dust protector. Move the locking hinge to the UP position and push it inward into the socket.

Installing the Access Gateway Model 9010 or 10010

After installing the Access Gateway in the rack and installing the SFP network ports, connect the Access Gateway to your network.
To install the Access Gateway Model 9010 or 10010

1.

Connect the Ethernet cables.

44

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2.

Connect a computer to the serial console on the front of the appliance. The terminal emulation application must have a baud rate and character format configured to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

3.

Power on the Access Gateway.

Important: The Access Gateway 9000 or 10000 series appliance have two power supplies. Citrix recommends that you use both power supplies. If only one power supply is used, the Access Gateway emits a high-pitched alert. Some models of the Access Gateway allow you to turn off the alert by pushing the small red button on the back of the appliance or under the face plate, near the LCD screen. If your appliance does not have this button, you cannot override the alert and you must use both power supplies.

Configuring Settings Using the Serial Console

When you first install the Access Gateway, you can configure the initial settings using the serial console. Connect a serial cable to the port on the Access Gateway and the other end to a computer. With the serial console, you can change the system IP address, create a mapped IP address, configure advanced network settings, and change the time zone. The terminal emulation application, such as Telnet or HyperTerminal, must have a baud rate of 9600, use eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity.
To configure initial settings using the serial console

1. 2. 3.

At a command prompt, log on using the default user name and password, nsroot. At a command prompt, type:
config ns

Follow the instructions on the screen.

Configuring Settings Using the Configuration Utility

The configuration utility allows you to configure most of the Access Gateway settings. You log on to the configuration utility using a Web browser.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

45

To log on to the configuration utility

1.

In a Web browser, type the system IP address of the Access Gateway, such as [Link] Note: The Access Gateway is configured with a default IP address of [Link] and subnet mask of [Link].

2.

In User Name and Password, type nsroot. Note: Citrix recommends changing the administrator password using the Setup Wizard.

3.

In Start in, select Configuration and click Login.

When you start the configuration utility, you are given the option of starting it one of two ways. The Applet Client is a Java-based client that allows you to start the configuration utility in a Web browser. The Web Start Client allows you to download Java components and start future connections to the configuration utility without typing the system IP address. Both clients require Java Runtime Environment (JRE) Version 1.4.x or later. The configuration utility has left and details panes that you can use to configure the Access Gateway. The left pane, called the navigation pane, contains the nodes that are used to configure settings on the Access Gateway. Depending on the node that you select in the navigation pane, the details pane displays the information for the node. After you log on, you can run the Setup Wizard to configure the initial settings on the Access Gateway.

Configuring TCP/IP Settings Using the Setup Wizard

When you first start the configuration utility, it opens on the System node in the navigation pane. From this node, you can run the Setup Wizard. If you did not configure the Access Gateway using the serial console, you can configure TCP/IP settings using the Setup Wizard and the Access Gateway wizard in the configuration utility. If you are configuring the Access Gateway using the Setup Wizard, connect the RJ-45 cables to the Access Gateway and then to the internal network.
To run the Setup Wizard

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click System.

46

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3.

In the details pane, click Setup Wizard. Click Next and follow the directions in the wizard.

Configuring Settings Using the Access Gateway Wizard

After running the Setup Wizard, run the Access Gateway wizard to configure additional settings on the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway wizard is run from the configuration utility.
To configure the Access Gateway using the Access Gateway wizard

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Getting Started, click Access Gateway wizard. Click Next and follow the instructions in the wizard.

The Access Gateway comes with a test certificate. If you do not have a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority, you can use the test certificate when using the Access Gateway wizard. When you receive the signed certificate, you can remove the test certificate and install the signed certificate. Citrix recommends obtaining the signed certificate before making the Access Gateway publicly available for users. Important: You can create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from within the Access Gateway wizard. If you create the CSR using the Access Gateway wizard, you must exit from the wizard and then start it again when the signed certificate is received from the Certificate Authority (CA). For more information about certificates, see Installing and Managing Certificates on page 79. Your can configure client connections for Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) in the Access Gateway wizard when you configure a virtual server. For more information about using IPv6 for client connections, see Configuring IPv6 for Client Connections on page 54.

Configuring Auto Negotiation

By default, the appliance is configured to use auto negotiation, which sets the direction for transmitted data. This is either half-duplex or full-duplex. For a first time installation, configure the Access Gateway to use auto negotiation for those ports connected to the appliance. After initial logon and configuration, auto negotiation can be disabled. Auto negotiation cannot be configured globally. It must be enabled or disabled for each interface.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

47

To enable or disable auto negotiation

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click Interfaces. In the details pane, select the interface and click Open. Do one of the following: To enable auto negotiation, click Yes and click OK. When this is enabled, the Access Gateway uses full duplex. To disable auto negotiation, click No and click OK. When this setting is selected, the Access Gateway uses half-duplex.

Configuring the Host Name

The host name is the name of the Access Gateway that is associated with the license file. The host name is unique to the Access Gateway and is used when you download the universal license. The host name is defined when you run the Setup Wizard to configure the Access Gateway for the first time.

Defining the Fully-Qualified Domain Name

The fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) is included in the signed certificate that is bound to a virtual server. This address can be the same as the appliance host name. One appliance can have a unique FQDN assigned to each virtual server that is configured on the Access Gateway using a signed certificate. The FQDN is not configured on the Access Gateway. You can find the FQDN of a certificate by viewing the details of the certificate. The FQDN is located in the subject field of the certificate.
To view the FQDN of a certificate

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand SSL and click Certificates. In the details pane, select a certificate and click Details. In the Certificate Details dialog box, click Subject.

The FQDN of the certificate appears in the pane.

Installing Licenses on the Access Gateway

Before an Access Gateway appliance can be deployed to support client connections, the appliance must be properly licensed.

48

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The Access Gateway requires two types of licenses: a platform license and a concurrent user (universal) license. Both of these licenses must be installed on the Access Gateway. Important: Citrix recommends that you retain a local copy of all license files that you receive. If you need to reinstall the Access Gateway server software and do not have a backup of the configuration, you will need the original license files. If you back up the Access Gateway configuration file, the license files are not saved. Before installing licenses on the Access Gateway, set the host name of the appliance and then restart the Access Gateway. The host name is configured using the Setup Wizard. When you generate the universal license for the Access Gateway, the host name is used in the license.

What the Platform License Is

The platform license enables SSL VPN functionality on the Access Gateway. If you are upgrading from a version earlier than 7.0, you must install the platform license on the Access Gateway immediately after upgrading the software to Version 9.0. You can download the platform license from the Citrix Web site. If this is a new appliance that is already running Version 9.0, the platform license is installed.
To download the platform license

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In a Web browser, go to [Link] and log on to My Citrix. Click Support and then click Downloads at the top of the Web page. Click Product Software. Under Citrix Access Gateway > Enterprise Edition, click Access Gateway 9.0, Enterprise Edition - Appliance Firmware. Accept the end user license agreement. Next to Platform License, click Get File. Save the license to your computer.

The platform license is downloaded as a .zip file. When the platform license is copied to your computer, you can install the platform license on the Access Gateway.
To install the platform license on the Access Gateway

1.

Unzip the platform license.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

49

2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Licenses. In the details pane, click Manage Licenses. Click Add, navigate to the platform license, click Select, and click OK.

When the platform license is installed, you are prompted to restart the Access Gateway. You can restart the appliance after installing the platform license or you can restart it after installing the universal license.

What the Universal License Is

The Access Gateway universal license limits the number of concurrent user sessions to the number of licenses purchased. If you purchase 100 licenses, you can have 100 concurrent sessions at any time. When a user ends a session, that license is released for the next user. A user who logs on to the Access Gateway from more than one computer occupies a license for each session. If all licenses are occupied, no additional connections can be opened until a user ends a session or the administrator terminates the session using the configuration utility. When a connection is closed, the license is released and can be used for a new user.

Obtaining Your Universal License Files

After you install the Access Gateway, you are ready to obtain your license files from Citrix. When you receive your Access Gateway appliance, licensing occurs in the following order: Receive the License Authorization Code (LAC) in email. Configure the Access Gateway with the host name using the Setup Wizard. Allocate the Access Gateway licenses from My Citrix. Use the host name to bind the licenses to the appliance during the allocation process. Generate the license entitlement and download the license file. Install the license file on the Access Gateway.

This process involves going to [Link] to access your available licenses and generating a license file. When the license file is generated, download it to the computer you are using to configure the appliance. After the license file is on the computer, you can upload it to the Access Gateway. Before going to the Citrix Web site, you need the following information:

50

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The license code. You can find the code on the Access Gateway CD, in an email you receive from Citrix, or from the Subscription Advantage Management-Renewal-Information system (SAMRI). Your user ID and password for My Citrix. You can register for this password on My Citrix. Note: If you cannot locate either of these items, contact Citrix Customer Care.

The host name of the Access Gateway. The entry field for this name on My Citrix is case-sensitive, so make sure that you copy the host name exactly as it is configured on the Access Gateway appliance. How many licenses you want to include in the license file. You do not have to download all of the licenses you are entitled to at once. For example, if your company purchases 100 licenses, you can choose to download 50. You can allocate the rest in another license file at a later time. Multiple license files can be installed on the Access Gateway.

Before obtaining your licenses, make sure you configure the host name of the appliance using the Setup Wizard and then restart the appliance. When you are ready to install the universal license on the Access Gateway, go to My Citrix to get your license.
To obtain your universal license file

1. 2.

From a Web browser, go to [Link] and click My Citrix. Enter your user name and password. If this is the first time you are logging on to the site, you are asked for additional background information.

3. 4.

Under My Tools, click Choose a toolbox, and click Activation System/ Manage Licenses. In the drop-down menu, select Activate/Allocate and follow the directions to obtain your license file.

After you successfully download the license file to your computer, you can install it on the Access Gateway. The license is installed on the Access Gateway in the /nsconfig/license directory. When you go to My Citrix to download your license, use the host name to bind the license to the appliance before generating the license file. When the file is generated, install the license on the Access Gateway.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

51

If you used the Setup Wizard to configure the initial settings on the Access Gateway, the license file is installed when you run the wizard. If you allocated part of your licenses, and then at a later date allocate an additional number, you can install the licenses without using the Setup Wizard.
To install licenses on the Access Gateway using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Licenses. Click Manage Licenses and then click Add. Navigate to the license file, select it, click Select, and then click OK to restart the Access Gateway.

After the Access Gateway restarts, verify that the license is correctly installed.
To view license information in the configuration utility

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Licenses. In the list, a green check mark will be next to Access Gateway. The field Maximum Access Gateway Users Allowed shows the number of licenses installed on the appliance.

Installing Licenses on Appliances in a High Availability Pair

Licenses can also be used when your deployment includes a high availability pair. If you are deploying the appliance as part of a high availability pair, both appliances must have the same host name. Only one appliance in the pair can be active. When the host name is configured, install the same license on both Access Gateway appliances. This ensures that if the primary appliance fails, the secondary appliance is fully licensed. Note: The same license can be installed on multiple Access Gateway appliances. In addition, the same license file can be shared by Access Gateway appliances in different locations to facilitate disaster recovery deployments.

Configuring Settings with the Access Gateway Policy Manager

The Access Gateway Policy Manager allows you to configure all of your policies in one place.

52

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The Access Gateway Policy Manager has two columns. The left pane shows the levels to which policies are bound. The details pane shows the polices that can be configured. To bind a policy, you can simply drag and drop the policy from Available Policies / Resources to the level to which you want it bound under Configured Policies / Resources. The exception to this are servers running the Secure Ticket Authority. These are configured at the Access Gateway Global or virtual server level in the left pane under Configured Policies / Resources. To create or modify a policy, such as a session policy, click on the node under Available Policies / Resources and then under Related Tasks, select the action you want to perform. In Related Tasks, you can create, modify, show bindings or remove policies.

Access Gateway Policy Manager You can start the Access Gateway Policy Manager in the configuration utility.
To start the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Policy Manager, click Change group settings and user permissions.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

53

Creating Additional Virtual Servers

A virtual server is an access point to which users log on. Each virtual server has its own IP address, certificate, and policy set. If you ran the Access Gateway wizard, a virtual server is configured during the wizard. You can configure additional virtual servers using the Access Gateway wizard, the Access Gateway Policy Manager, or the virtual servers node in the navigation pane of the configuration utility. If you use the Access Gateway Policy Manager, you can create a virtual server and then bind a certificate to the virtual server. You can also bind the following to virtual servers: Preauthentication policies Authentication policies Auditing policies Session policies Traffic policies Clientless access policies Bookmarks Intranet applications Access Gateway proxy (double-hop configuration) IP pooling (also known as intranet IPs) Secure Ticket Authority

If you want users to log on and use a specific authentication type, such as RADIUS, you can configure a virtual server and assign it a unique IP address. When users log on, they are directed to the virtual server and then are asked for their RADIUS credentials. You can also configure how users log on to the Access Gateway. You can use a session policy to configure the type of client software, the access method, and the home page users see after logging on. You can add, modify, enable or disable, and remove virtual servers using the Access Gateway Policy Manager or the virtual server node in the navigation pane of the configuration utility.
To create a virtual server using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway.

54

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3. 4. 5.

In the details pane, under Access Gateway Policy Manager, click Change group settings and user permissions. Under Configured Policies / Resources, click Virtual Servers. Under Related Tasks, click Create new virtual server. Configure the settings, click Create, and click Close.

To create a virtual server using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, click Add. Configure the settings you want, click Create, and click Close.

Configuring IPv6 for Client Connections

You can configure the Access Gateway to listen for client connections using IPv6. When you configure a virtual server, you can select the IPv6 check box and then enter the IPv6 address. When the Access Gateway virtual server is configured to listen on an IPv6 address, users can connect using Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps. Client connections using the Access Gateway Plug-in are not supported. When you configure IPv6 for client connections, the servers running Citrix XenApp and the Web Interface must be configured for IPv4. The Web Interface must be installed behind the Access Gateway. When users connect through the Access Gateway, the IPv6 address is translated to IPv4. When the connection returns the IPv4 address is translated to IPv6. You can configure IPv6 when you run the Access Gateway wizard or at a later time when you are configuring a virtual server. In the Access Gateway wizard on the Virtual Servers page, click IPv6 and enter the IP address.
To configure IPv6 with a virtual server

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, click Add. In Name, type a name for the virtual server. Click IPv6 and in IP Address, type the IPv6 address, configure your other settings, click Create and click Close.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

55

Configuring IP Addresses on the Access Gateway

You can configure IP addresses to log on to the configuration utility and for client connections. The Access Gateway is configured with a default IP address of [Link] and subnet mask of [Link] for management access. The default IP address is used whenever a user-configured value for the systems IP address is absent. System IP address. The management IP address for the Access Gateway that is used for all management-related access to the appliance. Mapped IP address. Used by the Access Gateway to represent the client when communicating with servers in the secure network. Default gateway. The router that forwards traffic from outside the secure network to the Access Gateway. Subnet IP address. Represents the client by communicating with a server on a secondary network. This is similar to the mapped IP address.

The system IP address, the mapped IP address, and default gateway are configured using the Setup Wizard.

Changing the Mapped IP Address

A mapped IP address cannot be changed. If one mapped IP address is configured on the appliance, it cannot be changed or deleted. If a second mapped IP address is configured, the first mapped IP address can be deleted. The Access Gateway uses one mapped IP address. Additional mapped IP addresses can be configured using either the Setup Wizard or the Network node in the configuration utility.
To configure a mapped IP address

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click IPs. In the details pane, click Add. In the Create IP dialog box, in IP Address, type the IP address. In Netmask, type the subnet mask. Under IP Type, select Mapped IP, click Create, and click Close.

56

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Subnet IP Addresses

This IP address allows the user to access an Access Gateway from an external host that resides on another subnet. When a subnet IP address is added, a corresponding route entry is made in the route table. Only one entry is made per subnet. The route entry corresponds to the first IP address added in the subnet. Unlike the system IP address and the mapped IP address, it is not mandatory to specify the subnet IP address during initial configuration of the Access Gateway. The mapped IP address and subnet IP address use ports 1024 through 64000.
To configure a subnet IP address

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click IPs. In the details pane, click Add. In the Create IP dialog box, in IP Address, type the IP address. In Netmask, type the subnet mask. Under IP Type, select Subnet IP, click Create, and click Close.

How the Access Gateway Uses IP Addresses

The Access Gateway sources traffic from IP addresses based on the function that is occurring. As a general guideline, the Access Gateway sources from the following: Authentication uses the system IP address File transfers from the home page use the system IP address DNS and WINS queries use either the mapped IP address or subnet IP address Network traffic to resources in the secure network use the mapped IP address, the subnet IP address, or IP pooling that depends on the configuration on the Access Gateway ICA proxy setting uses the mapped IP address or subnet IP address

Configuring Routing on the Access Gateway

To provide access to internal network resources, the Access Gateway must be capable of routing data to the internal networks. By default, the Access Gateway uses a static route.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

57

The networks to which the Access Gateway can route data are determined by the configuration of the Access Gateway routing table and the Default Gateway specified for the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway routing table must contain the routes necessary to route data to any internal network resource that a user may need to access. The Access Gateway supports the following routing protocols: Routing Information Protocol (RIP v1 and v2) Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Border Gateway Protocol (BGF)

Configuring a Static Route

When setting up communication with another host or network, a static route might need to be added from the Access Gateway to the new destination if you do not use dynamic routing.
To configure a static route

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network > Routing and click Routes. In the details pane, on the Basic tab, click Add. Configure the settings for the route and click Create.

To test a static route

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Diagnostics. In the details pane, under Utilities, click Ping. Under Parameters, in Host name, type the name of the device. Under Advanced, in Source IP Address, type the IP address of the device and click Run. If you are successfully communicating with the other device, messages indicate that the same number of packets were transmitted and received, and zero packets were lost. If you are not communicating with the other device, the status messages indicate that zero packets were received and all the packets were lost. To correct this, repeat the procedure to add a static route.

To stop the test, in the Ping dialog box, click Stop and click Close.

58

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Testing Your Access Gateway Configuration

After you configure the initial settings on the Access Gateway, you can test your settings by connecting to the appliance. To test your Access Gateway, create a local user account. Then, using either the virtual server IP address or FQDN of the certificate, open a Web browser and type the Web address. For example, in the address bar, type [Link] or [Link]
To create a local user account

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click Users. Under Related Tasks, click Create new user. In User Name, type the user name. Clear External Authentication. In Password and Confirm Password, type the password, click Create, and click Close.

If you receive a certificate warning, either a test certificate or an invalid certificate is installed on the Access Gateway. If a certificate signed by a CA is installed on the appliance, make sure there is a corresponding CA root certificate installed on the client device. If you used a CA-signed certificate, verify that you generated the site certificate correctly using the signed CSR, and that the distinguished name data entered in the CSR is accurate. The problem may also be a host name to IP address mismatch with the signed certificate. Check that the configured certificates common name corresponds to the configured virtual server IP address information. If the logon screen does not appear or if any other error message appears, review the setup process and confirm that all steps were performed correctly and that all parameters were entered accurately. At the logon screen, enter the user name and password of the user account you created earlier. You are prompted to install the Access Gateway Plug-in.

Configuring Name Service Providers

Name service providers are used to convert Web addresses to IP addresses. You can configure a domain name server (DNS) or a Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) server on the Access Gateway.

Chapter 4

Getting Started with Citrix Access Gateway

59

When you run the Access Gateway wizard, you can configure either a DNS server or a WINS server. If you need to configure additional DNS or WINS servers, you can do so using the configuration utility.
To add a DNS name server to the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Network Configuration tab, in DNS Server Addresses, click Add. In Enter the Name Server IP Address, type the IP address of the DNS server, click Create, click Close, and then click OK. Click Save in the configuration utility.

You can also add additional WINS name servers to the Access Gateway.
To add a WINS name server to the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway > Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Network Configuration tab, under DNS Server Addresses, in WINS Server IP, type the IP address of the WINS server and click OK.

Next, specify the DNS virtual server name and IP address. Like the Access Gateway virtual server, an IP address must be assigned to the virtual server. However, this IP address must be on the internal side of the targeted network so that all internal addresses are resolved properly by clients. The DNS port must also be specified. If you configure a DNS server and WINS server for name resolution, you can select which server performs name resolution first using the Access Gateway wizard.
To specify name lookup priority

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Getting Started, click Access Gateway wizard. Click Next to accept the current settings until you come to the Name Service Providers page. In Name Lookup Priority, select WINS or DNS and then continue to the end of the wizard.

60

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

C HAPTER 5

Configuring High Availability

If you have two Access Gateway appliances, you can deploy them in a configuration where one Access Gateway accepts and manages connections, while a second Access Gateway monitors the first appliance. If the first Access Gateway stops accepting connections for any reason, the second Access Gateway takes over and begins actively accepting connections. This prevents downtime and ensures that the services provided by the Access Gateway remain available, even if one Access Gateway is not working. This chapter covers configuring the Access Gateway in a high availability pair to support failover. In This Chapter How High Availability Works Configuring the Access Gateway for High Availability Customizing Your High Availability Deployment Synchronizing Access Gateway Appliances Enabling High Availability Propagation Forcing the Primary Access Gateway to Stay Primary Forcing the Secondary Appliance to Stay Secondary Forcing Failover between Access Gateway Appliances Configuring the Virtual MAC Address Configuring High Availability Pairs over Routed Networks Configuring Route Monitors Configuring Link Redundancy

62

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

How High Availability Works

When the Access Gateway is configured in a high availability pair, the secondary Access Gateway monitors the first appliance by sending periodic messages, also called a health check, to determine if the first appliance is accepting connections. If a health check fails, the secondary Access Gateway tries the connection again for a specified amount of time until it determines that the primary appliance is not working. When the determination is made, the secondary Access Gateway takes over for the primary Access Gateway. This is called failover. The following ports are used to exchange high availability-related information between Access Gateway appliances: UDP port 3003 is used to exchange hello packets for communicating the status for intervals TCP port 3010 is used for the high availability configuration synchronization TCP port 3011 is used to synchronize configuration settings

Gathering Information for High Availability

To record your settings for a high availability deployment, see the Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Pre-Installation Checklist. Before configuring a high availability pair, you need the following information: Each Access Gateway appliance must be running the same version of the Access Gateway software. You can find the version number in the configuration utility by clicking System in the navigation pane. The passwords for the administrator accounts on both Access Gateway appliances in a high availability pair must be the same. Because the operating system does not automatically synchronize these passwords, when you change the password of the administrator account on either Access Gateway, you must make the change manually on each Access Gateway appliance. Entries in the configuration file, [Link], on both the primary and the secondary Access Gateway must match, with the following exceptions: The primary and secondary Access Gateway appliance must each be configured with its own unique system IP address. Use the Setup Wizard to configure or modify the system IP address on either Access Gateway. In a high availability pair, the Access Gateway ID and associated IP address must point to the other Access Gateway.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

63

For example, if you have two appliances, named AG1 and AG2, you must configure AG1 with the unique Access Gateway ID and IP address of AG2, and AG2 with the unique Access Gateway ID and IP address of AG1. Note: Each Access Gateway appliance always refers to itself as Node 0. Configure each appliance with a unique node ID. Each appliance in the high availability pair must have the same license. For more information about licensing, see Installing Licenses on the Access Gateway on page 47. Any configuration file that you create or copy onto either Access Gateway using a method other than direct commands (such as SSL certificates or changes to startup scripts) must be created on or copied to both the primary and secondary Access Gateway.

When you configure a high availability pair, make sure the mapped IP addresses and default gateway address of both the primary and the secondary appliances are exactly the same. If necessary, you can change the mapped IP address at any time by running the Setup Wizard. For more information, see Configuring TCP/IP Settings Using the Setup Wizard on page 45.

Configuring the Access Gateway for High Availability

When configuring two Access Gateway appliances in a high availability pair, first configure the primary appliance and then the secondary appliance.

Adding a High Availability Node

Before you can configure the appliances, add a high availability node. This node represents either the first or second Access Gateway in the high availability pair. To configure high availability, you first create the node and then configure the settings.
To add a high availability node

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, click Add. In the High Availability Setup dialog box, in Remote Node IP Address, type the IP address of the second Access Gateway appliance. Leave the default settings, click OK and click Close.

64

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To configure settings for high availability

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select a node and click Open. In ID, type the number of the node identifier. ID specifies the unique node number for the other appliance.

4.

In IP Address, type the system IP address and click OK. IP Address specifies the IP address of the other appliance.

Note: The maximum ID for nodes in a high availability pair is 64.

Adding an RPC Node

You must configure RPC node passwords on both Access Gateway appliances in a high availability pair. Initially, each Access Gateway is configured with the same RPC node password. To enhance security, change these default RPC node passwords. Note: The Access Gateway administrator password and the RPC node password must be the same. To change the administrator password, run the Setup Wizard. To change the RPC node, see To create or change an RPC node password and enable a secure connection on page 65. RPC nodes are internal system entities used for system-to-system communication of configuration and session information. One RPC node exists on each Access Gateway. This node stores the password, which is checked against the one provided by the contacting Access Gateway. To communicate with other Access Gateway appliances, each appliance requires knowledge of the other appliances, including how to authenticate on the Access Gateway. RPC nodes maintain this information, which includes the IP addresses of the other Access Gateway appliances and the passwords used to authenticate on each. RPC nodes are configured and changed using the configuration utility. Important: Secure the network connection between the appliances. You can configure security when you configure the RPC node password.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

65

To create or change an RPC node password and enable a secure connection

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click RPC. In the details pane, select the node and then click Open. In Password, type the new password. In Confirm Password, type the password again. In Source IP Address, type the system IP address of the other Access Gateway appliance. Click Secure and click OK.

Configuring the Primary and Secondary Appliances for High Availability

After changing the RPC node password and enabling secure communication, configure the primary and secondary Access Gateway using the configuration utility.
To configure the primary and secondary Access Gateway

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select a node and click Open. Under High Availability Status, click Enabled and click OK.

Disabling Access Gateway Network Interfaces

When the Access Gateway appliances are deployed in a high availability setup, you must disable all network interfaces except the one connected to the network switch or [Link] a network interface is enabled, and is not connected, the Access Gateway interprets this as a failure and activates a failover event. On the Access Gateway that is going to be the secondary appliance, disable all network interfaces that are not connected or used for network traffic. After the network interfaces are disabled, you can configure the primary and secondary Access Gateway appliances.
To disable a network interface

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click Interfaces. In the details pane, select a network interface and click Disable.

66

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

3.

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each network interface you want to disable.

When the network interface is disabled, No appears in the Enabled column.

Customizing Your High Availability Deployment

When you configure the Access Gateway as a high availability pair, you can configure the secondary Access Gateway to listen at specific intervals. This is known as hello intervals and dead intervals.
To set intervals on the Access Gateway in a high availability pair

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select the node whose status must be changed and click Open. Under Intervals, do one or both of the following: In Hello Interval (msecs), type the value and click OK. In Dead Interval (msecs), type the value and click OK.

Synchronizing Access Gateway Appliances

You can configure the Access Gateway appliances in a high availability pair to synchronize automatically with one another. Automatic synchronization allows you to make changes to one appliance and have those changes propagate automatically to the second appliance.

Enabling and Disabling Synchronization

You can enable and disable synchronization on each Access Gateway appliance in a high availability pair.
To configure automatic synchronization on the primary appliance

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select the node you want to change and click Open. Under HA Synchronization, click Secondary node will fetch the configuration from Primary and click OK.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

67

You can prevent the secondary Access Gateway from synchronizing its configuration with the primary Access Gateway whenever there is a change on the primary.
To disable a node from synchronizing automatically

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select the node you want to change and click Open. Under HA Synchronization, click to clear Secondary node will fetch the configuration from Primary and click OK.

Forcing Synchronization between Appliances

In addition to automatic synchronization, the Access Gateway supports forced synchronization between the two nodes in a high availability pair. You can force synchronization on both the primary and secondary Access Gateway appliances. However, if synchronization is already in progress, the command fails and the Access Gateway displays a warning. Forced synchronization also fails in the following circumstances: The command is executed on a standalone Access Gateway The command is executed on an Access Gateway where high availability is disabled The command is executed on an Access Gateway that has high availability synchronization disabled

To force synchronization between Access Gateway appliances

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Nodes tab, click Force Synchronization.

To verify that synchronization occurred, on the Nodes tab, check the entry under Synchronization State.

68

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Enabling High Availability Propagation

In a correct high availability setup, settings configured on the primary Access Gateway propagate automatically to the secondary Access Gateway. You can test your high availability configuration by making configuration changes to your primary Access Gateway, then testing to see if the changes are propagated to your secondary Access Gateway.
To enable configuration propagation to the secondary appliance

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Nodes tab, select the node you want to change and click Open. Under HA Propagation, click Primary node will propagate configuration to the Secondary and click OK.

Disabling Propagation
When propagation is disabled on the primary Access Gateway after synchronization is successful, changes to settings on the primary appliance are not propagated to the secondary Access Gateway. However, if synchronization occurs during this period, the configuration changes that were made when propagation was disabled are synchronized with the secondary Access Gateway. This is also true for cases where propagation is disabled when synchronization is in progress. When you disable propagation on both appliances, it is effective only on the primary Access Gateway. When propagation is enabled again, force the synchronization between the appliances. When you disable propagation on a primary node after synchronization is successfully completed, commands executed on the primary node are not propagated to the secondary node. However, if synchronization occurs during this period, the configuration-related changes that you made when propagation was disabled are synchronized with the secondary node. This is also true for cases where propagation is disabled while synchronization is in progress. Note: If command propagation is disabled and then enabled, force synchronization between the appliances to make sure the commands are properly synchronized.

To disable command propagation

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

69

2. 3.

On the Nodes tab, select the node you want to change and click Open. Under HA propagation, click to clear Primary node will propagate configuration to the Secondary and click OK.

To verify command propagation in your high availability pair

1. 2.

On the Nodes tab, click a node and click Open. Verify that the settings are the same as for the other node in the high availability pair and click OK.

Troubleshooting Command Propagation

This sections lists reasons for command propagation failure and their solutions. Network connectivity is not active. If a command propagation fails, check the network connection between the primary and secondary Access Gateway appliances. Missing resources on secondary Access Gateway. If a command execution succeeds on the primary Access Gateway but fails to propagate to the secondary Access Gateway, run the command directly on the secondary Access Gateway to see the error message. The error may have occurred because the resources required by the command are present on the primary Access Gateway and are not available on the secondary Access Gateway. Also, verify that the license files on each appliance match. For example, verify that all of your SSL certificates are present on each Access Gateway. Verify that any initialization script customization exists on both Access Gateway appliances. Authentication failure. If you receive an authentication failure error message, verify the RPC node settings on both appliances.

Forcing the Primary Access Gateway to Stay Primary

In a high availability setup, the primary Access Gateway can be forced to stay primary even after failover.
To force the primary Access Gateway to stay primary

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select a node and click Open. Under High Availability Status, click Stay Primary and click OK.

70

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

This setting can be configured only on Access Gateway appliances that are a standalone and the Access Gateway that is the primary in a high availability pair. On a standalone Access Gateway appliance, this setting must be configured before adding a second Access Gateway to create a high availability pair. When you add the new appliance, the existing Access Gateway stops processing traffic and becomes the secondary Access Gateway in the high availability pair. The new Access Gateway becomes the primary appliance. This configuration can be cleared only by using the following command:
clear configuration full

The following commands do not change the Access Gateway configuration:

clear configuration basic clear configuration extended

Setting the Access Gateway as primary is not propagated or synchronized and affects only the Access Gateway on which the setting is configured.

Forcing the Secondary Appliance to Stay Secondary

In a high availability setup, the secondary Access Gateway can be forced to stay secondary, independent of the state of the primary Access Gateway. For example, in an existing high availability setup, suppose that the primary Access Gateway has to be upgraded and that this process takes a specified amount of time. During the upgrade, the primary Access Gateway could become unavailable, but you do not want the secondary Access Gateway to take over. You want it to remain the secondary Access Gateway, even if it detects a failure in the primary Access Gateway.
To force the secondary Access Gateway to stay secondary

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select a node and click Open. Under High Availability Status, click Stay Secondary and click OK.

When the Access Gateway is configured to stay secondary, it remains secondary even if the primary Access Gateway fails. If the status of an Access Gateway in a high availability pair is configured to stay secondary, it does not participate in high availability state machine transitions. You can check the status of the Access Gateway in the configuration utility on the Nodes tab. This setting works on both a standalone and a secondary Access Gateway.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

71

On a secondary Access Gateway, this setting forces the Access Gateway to remain a secondary Access Gateway even if there is a failure in the primary Access Gateway. When you set the high availability node, it is not propagated or synchronized and affects only the Access Gateway on which the setting is configured.
To return the Access Gateway to service as an active high availability appliance

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System > High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select the appliance that is going to stay the primary node and click Open. Under High Availability Status, click Enabled and click OK.

Forcing Failover between Access Gateway Appliances

You can force failover on an Access Gateway. For example, you might want to force failover to the secondary Access Gateway appliance so you can replace or upgrade your primary Access Gateway. You can force failover on either the primary or secondary Access Gateway. If you attempt to execute force failover on a standalone appliance, you receive an error message.
To force failover

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, select the appliance to which you want to force failover and click Force Failover.

When this force failover is set, the Access Gateway appears in a down state. Force failover is not propagated or synchronized. Synchronization happens automatically whenever there is a change to the configuration of the primary Access Gateway. The synchronization status appears in the configuration utility. Note: When the force failover is executed on the primary Access Gateway and the second Access Gateway is configured to remain as the secondary appliance, an error message appears. Change your configuration to allow the secondary appliance to become primary.

72

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Forcing Failover on the Primary Access Gateway

When the force failover command is executed on the primary Access Gateway, the primary becomes the secondary Access Gateway and the secondary becomes the primary. Forced failover happens only when the primary Access Gateway is able to determine that the secondary Access Gateway is active. If the secondary Access Gateway is not active, the force failover command returns the error message Operation not possible due to invalid peer state. Rectify and retry. If the secondary Access Gateway is in a claiming or inactive state, it returns the message Operation not possible now. Please wait for system to stabilize before retrying.

Forcing Failover on the Secondary Access Gateway

When the force failover command is executed from the secondary appliance, the secondary Access Gateway becomes the primary Access Gateway. Force failover happens only if the secondary appliances health is good or if the device is not configured to stay secondary. If the secondary Access Gateway cannot become the primary Access Gateway, or if the secondary Access Gateway is configured to stay secondary, the Access Gateway displays the message Operation not possible as my state is invalid. Use show node for more information.

Forcing Failover in Listen Mode

When two Access Gateway appliances in a high availability pair run different versions of the system software, the Access Gateway running the latest version goes into listen mode. In this mode, neither command propagation nor synchronization work. However, you might need to test the new version of the system software on one Access Gateway before upgrading the other one. To do this, you need to force a failover on the system that was upgraded. Although the upgraded system takes over as the primary Access Gateway, neither command propagation nor synchronization happens. In addition, all the connections need to be established again.
To force synchronization

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, select the appliance that is going to stay the primary node and click Force Synchronization.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

73

Configuring the Virtual MAC Address

The virtual MAC address is shared by the primary and secondary Access Gateway appliances in a high availability setup. In a high availability setup, the primary Access Gateway owns all the floating IP addresses, such as the mapped IP address or the virtual IP address. It responds to address resolution protocol (ARP) requests for these IP addresses with its own MAC address. As a result, the ARP table of an external device (such as a router) is updated with the floating IP address and the primary Access Gateway MAC address. When a failover occurs, the secondary Access Gateway takes over as the new primary Access Gateway. It then uses gratuitous address resolution protocol (GARP) to advertise the floating IP addresses that it acquired from the primary appliance. The MAC address, which the new primary appliance advertises, is that of its own interface. Some devices do not accept GARP messages generated by the Access Gateway. As a result, some of the external devices retain the old IP to MAC mapping advertised by the old primary Access Gateway. This can cause a site to become unavailable. To resolve the problem, configure a virtual MAC address on both Access Gateway appliances of a high availability pair. This implies that both the Access Gateway appliances have identical MAC addresses. As a result, when failover occurs, the MAC address of the secondary Access Gateway remains unchanged and ARP tables on the external devices do not need to be updated.

Configuring the Virtual MAC Address

The virtual MAC address is a user-defined address that is shared by the primary and secondary appliances. To create a virtual MAC address, create a virtual router identifier and bind it to an interface. In a high availability setup, the user needs to bind it to the interfaces on both the appliances. When the virtual router identifier is bound to an interface, the system generates a virtual MAC address with the virtual router identifier as the last octet. An example of the generic virtual MAC address is [Link]<VRID>. For example, if you created a virtual router identifier of value 60 and bind it to an interface, the resulting virtual MAC address is [Link], where 3c is the hex representation of the virtual router identifier. You can create 255 virtual router identifiers ranging from 1 to 254.
To configure a virtual MAC address

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click VMAC. In the details pane, click Add. In Virtual Router ID, type the value.

74

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

4.

Under Associated Interfaces, in Available Interfaces, select a network interface, click Add, click Create, and click Close.

When the virtual MAC address is created, it appears in the configuration utility. If you selected a network interface, the virtual router identifier is bound to that interface.

Deleting a Virtual MAC Address

To delete a virtual MAC address, you need to delete the corresponding virtual router identifier.
To remove a virtual MAC address

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click VMAC. In the details pane, select an item and click Remove.

Binding and Unbinding a Virtual MAC Address

When you created the virtual router identifier, you selected a network interface on the Access Gateway and then bound the virtual router identifier to the network interface. You can also unbind a virtual MAC address from the network interface, but leave the MAC address configured on the Access Gateway.
To unbind the virtual router identifier from the network interface

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click VMAC. In the details pane, select an item and click Open. Under Configured Interfaces, select a network interface, click Remove, click OK, and click Close.

Configuring High Availability Pairs over Routed Networks

The previous section covered the typical deployment of high availability, where both the appliances that comprise a high availability pair reside on the same subnet. A high availability deployment can also consist of two Access Gateway appliances with each appliance located in a different network. This section describes a high availability configuration with the Access Gateway appliances on different networks. It also provides some sample configurations, and a list of differences between the high availability configurations within one network and across networks.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

75

This section also discusses link redundancy and route monitors, Access Gateway functions that can be helpful in a cross-network high availability configuration, and covers the health check process used by each Access Gateway to ensure that its partner appliance is active.

How Independent Network Configuration Works

The Access Gateway appliances are connected to different routers, called R3 and R4, on two different networks. The appliances exchange heartbeat packets through these routers. You can expand this configuration to accommodate deployments involving any number of interfaces. Note: To make sure that heartbeat packets are sent and received successfully if static routing is configured, you must add the static routes from each Access Gateway to the other appliance. When the appliances in a high availability pair reside on two different networks, the secondary Access Gateway must have an independent network configuration. This means that Access Gateway appliances on different networks cannot share mapped IP addresses, virtual LANs, or network routes. This type of configuration, where the Access Gateway appliances in a high availability pair have different configurable parameters, is known as independent network configuration or symmetric network configuration. The following table summarizes the configurable parameters for an independent network configuration, and shows how they must be set on each Access Gateway.
Configurable Parameters IP addresses Virtual IP address Virtual LAN Routes Access Control Lists (ACLs) Dynamic routing Behavior Access Gateway specific. Active only on that appliance. Floating. Access Gateway specific. Active only on that appliance. Access Gateway specific. Active only on that appliance. LLB route is floating. Floating (Common). Active on both appliances. Access Gateway specific. Active only on that appliance. The secondary Access Gateway should also run the routing protocols and peer with upstream routers. Floating (Common). Active on both appliances. Floating (Common). Active on both appliances. Access Gateway specific. Reverse network address translation with virtual IP address as network address translation IP address is floating.

L2 mode L3 mode Reverse network address translation

76

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring an Independent Network Computing High Availability Pair

When two Access Gateway appliances of a high availability pair reside on different subnets, each Access Gateway must have a different network configuration. For this reason, to configure two independent Access Gateway appliances to function as a high availability pair, you must specify independent network computing mode during the configuration process
To configure an independent network computing high availability pair

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. In the details pane, on the Nodes tab, click Add. In the High Availability Setup dialog box, in the Remote Node IP Address, type the IP address. Click Turn on INC (Independent Network Configuration) mode on self node, click OK and click Close.

Configuring Route Monitors

When the appliances of a high availability pair reside on different networks, the high availability state of an Access Gateway depends on its reachability. In a cross-network high availability configuration, a route monitor on each Access Gateway watches the internal routing table to make sure that an entry for the other Access Gateway is always present.
To add route monitors

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Route Monitors tab, click Configure. Under Specify Route Monitor, in Network, type the IP address of the network of the other Access Gateway appliance. In Netmask, type the subnet mask of the other network, click Add, and click OK.

When this procedure is complete, the route monitor is bound to the Access Gateway.

Chapter 5

Configuring High Availability

77

Note: When a route monitor is not bound to an Access Gateway, the high availability state of either appliance is determined by the state of the interfaces. You can remove a route monitor from the Access Gateway.
To remove a route monitor

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Route Monitors tab, click Configure. Under Configured Route Monitors, select the monitor, click Remove, and click OK.

Configuring Link Redundancy

Link redundancy group network interfaces together to prevent failover due to a failure on one network interface of an Access Gateway that has other functioning interfaces. The failure of the first interface on the primary Access Gateway triggers failover, although it can still serve client requests using its second link. When link redundancy is configured, you can group the two interfaces into a failover interface set, preventing the failure of a single link from causing failover to the secondary Access Gateway unless all interfaces on the primary Access Gateway are nonfunctional. Each interface in a failover interface set maintains independent bridge entries. The enabled and the high availability monitor interfaces on an Access Gateway that are not bound to a failed interface set are known as critical interfaces, because if any of them fails, failover is triggered.
To enable link redundancy on multiple interfaces

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Failover Interface Set tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the set. Under Available Interfaces, select an interface and click Add. Repeat Step 4 for the second interface, click Create, and click Close.

You can add as many interfaces as you need for failover between the interfaces. After you configure a failover interface set, you can remove interfaces.

78

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To remove an interface from the failover interface set

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Failover Interface Set tab, select a set and click Open. In the Configure FIS dialog box, under Configured Interfaces, select the interface(s) you want to remove, click Remove, and click OK.

If the failover interface set is no longer needed, you can remove it from the Access Gateway.
To remove a failover interface set

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click High Availability. On the Failover Interface Set tab, select a set and click Remove.

C HAPTER 6

Installing and Managing Certificates

On the Access Gateway, certificates are used to create secure connections and authenticate users. To establish a secure connection, you require a server certificate at one end of the connection and a root certificate of the Certificate Authority (CA) that issued the server certificate at the other end. Server certificate. A server certificate certifies the identity of a server. The type of digital certificate that is required by the Access Gateway is called a server certificate. Root certificate. A root certificate identifies the CA that signed the server certificate. The root certificate belongs to the CA. This type of digital certificate is required by a client device to verify the server certificate.

When establishing a secure connection with a Web browser on a client device, the server sends its certificate to the client. When receiving a server certificate, the Web browser (for example, Internet Explorer) on the client device checks to see which CA issued the certificate and if the CA is trusted by the client. If the CA is not trusted or if it is a test certificate, the Web browser prompts the user to accept or decline the certificate (effectively accepting or declining the ability to access this site). The Access Gateway supports three types of certificates: A test certificate that is bound to a virtual server and can also be used for connections to a server farm. The Access Gateway comes with a preinstalled test certificate. A certificate in PEM or DER format that is signed by a Certificate Authority (CA) and is paired with a private key. A certificate in PKCS#12 format that is used for storing or transporting the certificate and private key. The PKCS#12 certificate is typically exported from an existing Windows certificate as a PFX file and then installed on the Access Gateway.

Citrix recommends using a certificate signed by a trusted Certificate Authority, such as Thawte or Verisign.

80

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

In This Chapter Installing Certificates on the Access Gateway Creating a Private Key Creating a Certificate Signing Request Installing the Signed Certificate on the Access Gateway Unbinding Test Certificates from the Virtual Server Configuring Intermediate Certificates Importing an Existing Certificate to the Access Gateway

Installing Certificates on the Access Gateway

The Access Gateway comes with a pre-installed test certificate. A server certificate signed by a CA should be installed on the Access Gateway to replace the test certificate. If a signed certificate is not installed on the appliance, the Access Gateway uses the test certificate. If you do not have a CA-signed certificate, you can generate a certificate request that is sent to the CA for signing. There are two ways to create a Certificate Signing Request: Using the Access Gateway wizard Using the Certificate Authority tools in the configuration utility

The steps for creating and installing a CA-signed certificate on the Access Gateway are: Creating a private key that is paired with the certificate Creating a Certificate Signing Request that is sent to the CA Installing the signed certificate and private key on the Access Gateway Installing root certificates on client devices

You can manage your certificates using the configuration utility. You can add and remove certificates; create Certificate Signing Requests; and create root, intermediate, and server certificates.

Chapter 6

Installing and Managing Certificates

81

Creating a Private Key

Private keys that are generated with the Certificate Signing Request are stored in an encrypted and password-protected format on the Access Gateway. When creating the Certificate Signing Request, you are asked to provide a password for the private key. The password is used to protect the private key from tampering, and it is also required when restoring a saved configuration to the Access Gateway. Passwords are used whether the private key is encrypted or unencrypted. You can also import a password-protected certificate and private key in the PKCS#12 format. This allows encrypted and password-protected private keys and certificates created on the Access Gateway to be imported. Two types of private keys can be created on the Access Gateway: RSA and DSA. An RSA private key is the most commonly used private key. It provides strong encryption and security for the Access Gateway. Citrix recommends using an RSA private key on the Access Gateway. A DSA private key is an older type of private key. It also provides encryption and is paired with the server certificate. Creating a private key is the starting point for creating secure certificates. You specify the name of the private key and the key bit length. The supported lengths are 512, 1024, and 2048 bits. The private key is required to install a valid certificate issued by the CA. The certificate that you receive from the CA is valid only with the private key used to create the Certificate Signing Request (CSR). For added security, encrypt your private key with Data Encryption Standard (DES) or triple DES (3DES). The DES and 3DES options are valid only for keys stored in PEM format, not for keys stored in DER format. To create the CSR, you need either an RSA or a DSA private key. When you create a CSR using the Access Gateway wizard, a private key is generated with the CSR. You can also create a private key separately and then pair it with the certificate. Note: Citrix recommends using a password to protect the private key and to use the private key generated by the CSR.

To create an RSA private key

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click SSL. In the details pane, under SSL Keys, click Create RSA Key.

82

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

3. 4. 5.

In Key Filename, type the name of the private key or click Browse to navigate to an existing file. In Key Size (Bits), type the size of the private key. In Key Format, select PEM or DER. Citrix recommends PEM format for the certificate.

6. 7.

In PEM Encoding Algorithm, select DES or 3DES. In PEM Passphrase and Verify Passphrase, type the password, click Create and click Close.

To create a DSA private key in the configuration utility, click Create DSA Key. Follow the same steps above to create the DSA private key.

Creating a Certificate Signing Request

To provide secure communications using SSL/TLS, a server certificate is required on the Access Gateway. Before you can upload a certificate to the Access Gateway, you need to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and private key. The CSR is created using the Create Certificate Request included in the Access Gateway wizard or using the configuration utility. The Create Certificate Request creates a .csr file that is emailed to the Certificate Authority for signing. The Certificate Authority signs the certificate and returns it to you at the email address you provided. When it is received, you can install it on the Access Gateway. Important: When you create the CSR using the Access Gateway wizard, you must exit the wizard and wait for the CA to send you the signed certificate. When the certificate is received, you can run the Access Gateway wizard again to create the settings and install the certificate. For more information about the Access Gateway wizard, see Configuring Settings Using the Access Gateway Wizard on page 46.

To create a Certificate Signing Request using the Access Gateway wizard

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Getting Started, click Access Gateway wizard. Follow the directions in the wizard until you come to the Specify server certificate page. Click Create a Certificate Signing Request and complete the fields.

Chapter 6

Installing and Managing Certificates

83

Note: The FQDN does not need to be the same as the Access Gateway host name. 5. 6. Click Save to save the certificate on your computer and click Close. Exit the Access Gateway wizard without saving your settings.

You can also create a CSR using the configuration utility, without running the Access Gateway wizard.
To create a Certificate Signing Request in the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click SSL. In the details pane, under SSL Certificates, click Create Certificate Request. Complete the settings for the certificate and click Create.

After you create the certificate and private key, email the certificate to the CA, such as Thawte or Verisign.

Installing the Signed Certificate on the Access Gateway

When you receive the signed certificate from the CA, pair it with the private key and then install the certificate on the Access Gateway.
To install the CA-signed certificate and private key on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand SSL and click Certificates. In the details pane, click Add. In Certificate-Key Pair Name, type the name of the certificate. Under Details, in File Location, click Local Computer, click Browse, navigate to the certificate, click Select, and click Install. In File Location, click Appliance. In Private Key File Name, click Browse, click the file, and click Select. The name of the private key is the same name as the Certificate Signing Request. The private key is located on the Access Gateway in the directory \nsconfig\ssl.

7.

If the certificate is PEM-format, in Password, type the password for the private key.

84

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

8.

If you want to configure notification for when the certificate expires, in Expiry Monitor, click Enable. In Notification Period, type the number of days, click Install, and click Close.

Binding the Certificate and Private Key to a Virtual Server

When a certificate and private key pair are created and linked, bind it to a virtual server.
To bind a certificate and private key to a virtual server

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, select a virtual server and click Open. On the Certificates tab, under Available, select a certificate and click Add.

Unbinding Test Certificates from the Virtual Server

After you install the signed certificate, unbind any test certificates that are bound to the virtual server. You can unbind test certificates using the configuration utility.
To unbind test certificates

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, click a virtual server and click Open. On the Certificates tab, under Configured, select the test certificate and click Remove.

Configuring Intermediate Certificates

An intermediate certificate is a certificate that goes between the Access Gateway (the server certificate) and a root certificate (usually installed on the client device). An intermediate certificate is part of a chain. Some organizations delegate the responsibility for issuing certificates to resolve the issue of geographical separation between organization units, or that of applying different issuing policies to different sections of the organization.

Chapter 6

Installing and Managing Certificates

85

Responsibility for issuing certificates can be delegated by setting up subordinate CAs. The X.509 standard includes a model for setting up a hierarchy of CAs. In this model, the root CA is at the top of the hierarchy and has a self-signed certificate. The CAs that are directly subordinate to the root CA have CA certificates signed by the root CA. CAs under the subordinate CAs in the hierarchy have their CA certificates signed by the subordinate CAs.

The X.509 model showing the hierarchical structure of a typical digital certificate chain CAs can sign their own certificates (that is, they are self-signed) or they can be signed by another CA. If the certificate is self-signed, it is called root CAs. If they are not self-signed, they are called subordinate or intermediate CAs. If a server certificate is signed by a CA with a self-signed certificate, the certificate chain is composed of exactly two certificates: the end entity certificate and the root CA. If a user or server certificate is signed by an intermediate CA, the certificate chain is longer.

86

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The following figure shows that the first two elements are the end entity certificate (in this case, [Link]) and the certificate of the intermediate CA, in that order. The intermediate CAs certificate is followed by the certificate of its CA. This listing continues until the last certificate in the list is for a root CA. Each certificate in the chain attests to the identity of the previous certificate.

A typical digital certificate chain

To install an intermediate certificate

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand SSL and click Certificates. In the details pane, click Add. In Certificate-Key Pair Name, type the name of the certificate. Under Details, select either Local Computer or Appliance. Next to Certificate File Name, click Browse to navigate to the certificate on your computer or on the Access Gateway. In Certificate Format, select PEM. Click Install and click Close.

When you install an intermediate certificate on the Access Gateway, you do not need to specify the private key or a password. After the certificate is installed on the appliance, the certificate needs to be linked to the server certificate.
To link an intermediate certificate to a server certificate

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand SSL and click Certificates. In the details pane, select the intermediate certificate and click Link. Next to CA Certificate Name, select the certificate from the list and click OK.

Chapter 6

Installing and Managing Certificates

87

Importing an Existing Certificate to the Access Gateway

You can import an existing certificate from a Windows computer running Internet Information Services (IIS) or from a computer running the Secure Gateway. In some cases, the private key cannot be exported, which means you cannot install the certificate on the Access Gateway. If this occurs, use the Certificate Signing Request to create a new certificate. For more information, see Creating a Certificate Signing Request on page 82.

Exporting a Certificate from a Windows Server

When you export a certificate and private key from Windows, it creates a PFX file. This file is then installed on the Access Gateway as a PKCS#12 certificate.

Exporting a Certificate from the Secure Gateway

If you are replacing the Secure Gateway with the Access Gateway, you can export the certificate and private key from the Secure Gateway. If you are doing an inplace migration from the Secure Gateway to the Access Gateway, the FQDN on both must be the same. When you export the certificate from the Secure Gateway, you immediately retire the Secure Gateway, install the certificate on the Access Gateway, and then test the configuration. The Secure Gateway and the Access Gateway cannot be running on your network at the same time if they both have the same FQDN. For more information about replacing the Secure Gateway, see the Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.
To export a certificate from a Windows computer

1.

From the console of the Secure Gateway or an Internet Information Services (IIS) server where a secure certificate is installed, click Start > Run and type [Link]. On the File menu, click Add/Remove Snap-in. On the Standalone tab, click Add and select Certificates. Click Add, select Computer account, and click Next. Select Local computer, click Finish, click Close and click OK. In the MMC, expand Certificates (Local Computer) > Personal > Certificates. Right-click the server certificate, click All tasks, and click Export. Follow the directions in the Certificate Export Wizard.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

88

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

As you go through the wizard, click Yes to export the private key with the certificate. If this option is not available, you cannot use the certificate. Leave the default values for all the other options, define a password, and save the PFX file to your computer. When the certificate is exported, you then install it on the Access Gateway.
To install the certificate and private key on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Getting Started, click Access Gateway wizard. Click Next, select an existing virtual server and click Next. In Certificate Options, select Install a PKCS#12 (.pfx) file. In PKCS#12 File Name, click Browse and navigate to the certificate. In Password, type the password for the private key. This is the password you used when converting the certificate to PEM format.

7.

Click Next to finish the Access Gateway wizard without changing any other settings.

When the certificate is installed on the Access Gateway, it appears in the configuration utility in the SSL > Certificates node.

C HAPTER 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

Policies allow you to manage and implement configuration settings under specified scenarios or conditions. An individual policy states or defines the configuration settings that go into effect when a specified set of conditions are met. Each policy has a unique name and can have a profile bound to the policy. In This Chapter How Policies Work Configuring System Expressions Creating Policies on the Access Gateway How Session Policies Work How a Traffic Policy Works How TCP Compression Policies Work

For more information about authentication and authorization policies, see Configuring Authentication and Authorization on page 111. For more information about configuring clientless access, see How Clientless Access Works on page 174. For more information about configuring endpoint policies, see Configuring Endpoint Polices on page 223.

How Policies Work

A policy consists of a Boolean condition and collection of settings called a profile. The condition is evaluated at runtime to determine if the policy should be applied. A profile is a collection of settings, using specific parameters. The profile can have any name and it can be reused in more than one policy. There can be multiple settings within the profile, but there is one profile per policy.

90

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Policies, with the configured conditions and profiles, can be bound to virtual servers, groups, users, or globally. Policies are referred to by the type of configuration settings they control. For example, in a session policy, you can control how users log on and the amount of time users can stay logged on. If you are using the Access Gateway with Citrix XenApp, Access Gateway policy names are sent to XenApp as filters. When configuring the Access Gateway to work with XenApp and SmartAccess, the administrator uses the settings in XenApp for Access Gateway Advanced Edition, substituting the following to create the policy: The name of the virtual server that is configured on the appliance is sent to XenApp as the Access Gateway farm name The names of the pre-authentication or session policies are sent as filter names

For more information about configuring the Access Gateway to work with Citrix Presentation Server, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop. For more information about preauthentication policies, see Configuring Endpoint Polices on page 223.

Setting Priorities of Policies

Policies are prioritized according to the service they are bound to: global, virtual server, group, or user. A policy that is bound to a user has the highest priority and takes precedence over a policy bound to a group, virtual server, or globally. The priority of policies is determined by two methods: The level to which the policy is bound: globally, virtual server, group, or user. Users have the highest priority and global has the lowest. The numerical priority takes precedence regardless of where the policy is bound. If a policy that is bound globally has a priority number of one and another policy bound to a user has a priority number of two, the global policy takes precedence. The lower the priority number, the higher the precedence is for the policy.

Configuring Conditional Policies

When configuring policies, you can use any Boolean expression to express the condition for when the policy applies. You can use any of the available system expressions, such as client security strings, network information, HTTP headers and cookies, time of day, or client certificate values. Policies can be created to apply only when the client device meets specific criteria, such as a session policy for SmartAccess.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

91

Policy conditions based on endpoint analysis results cannot be used if the policy rule is configured as part of security settings in a session profile. Another example of configuring a conditional policy is varying the authentication policy for users. For example, users who are connecting using the Access Gateway Plug-in from outside the internal network, such as from their home computer, can be authenticated using LDAP. Users who are connecting through a WAN can be authenticated using RADIUS.

Configuring System Expressions

A system expression specifies the conditions under which the policy is enforced. For example, expressions in a preauthentication policy are enforced when a user is logging on, while expressions in a session policy are evaluated and enforced after the user is authenticated and logged on to the Access Gateway. Expressions on the Access Gateway include: General expressions that limit the objects users can use when establishing a connection to the Access Gateway Client security expression that defines the software, files, processes, or registry values that must be installed and running on the client device Network-based that restricts access based on network settings

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition can also be used as a Citrix NetScaler appliance. Some expressions on the appliance are more applicable to NetScaler. General and network-based expressions are used commonly with NetScaler and are not generally used with Access Gateway. Client security expressions are used on the Access Gateway to determine that the correct items are installed on the client device.

Configuring Client Security Expressions

Expressions are a component of a policy. An expression represents a single condition that is evaluated against a request or a response. You can create a simple expression security string to check for conditions such as: Client operating system including service packs Antivirus software version and virus definitions Files Processes Registry values

92

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

User certificates

Creating Simple Expressions

Simple expressions check for a single condition. An example of a simple expression is:
[Link] == HTTP://[Link]

Creating Compound Expressions

Compound expressions check for multiple conditions. Compound expressions are created by connecting to one or more expression names using the logical operators && and ||, grouped for order of evaluation using the symbols. Compound expressions can be categorized as: Named expressions Inline expressions

Named expressions are independent entities. A named expression can be reused by other policies and are included within the policy. Named expressions are configured at the system level in the configuration utility. You can use a predefined named expression in the policy or create one of your own.
To create a named expression

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand AppExpert and click Expressions. In the details pane, click Add. In the Create Policy Expression dialog box, in Expression Name, type a name for the expression. In Error Message, type the message that users see in the connection log if the client device fails to meet the policy criteria. To create an expression, click Add. Configure the parameters of the expression, click OK, and click Create.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

93

Adding Custom Expressions

If you are creating a policy, you can create a custom expression while configuring the policy. For example, you are creating a session profile to allow users to log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in, set a time limit for the session, and allow single sign-on with Windows. After creating the session profile, in the Create Session Policy dialog box, you can create the expression. The following example shows an expression that checks for a process and antivirus application.

Creating a compound custom expression while configuring a session policy

Creating Policies on the Access Gateway

You can create policies using either the configuration utility or the Access Gateway Policy Manager. After a policy is created, you bind the policy to the appropriate level: user, group, virtual server, or global. When a policy is bound to one of these levels, users receive the settings within the profile if the policy conditions are met. Each policy and profile has a unique name. The Access Gateway Policy Manager provides an easy way to configure multiple policies and then binding the policies quickly to the appropriate level. Using the expandable nodes in the left and right panes, you can configure the policy in the right pane and then simply drag-and-drop the policy to the node in the left pane.

How Session Policies Work

A session policy is a collection of expressions and settings that are applied to users, groups, virtual servers, and globally.

94

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

A session policy is used for configuring the settings for client connections. You can define settings to configure the client software users log on with, such as the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows or the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX. Session policies are evaluated and applied after the user is authenticated. Session policies are applied according to the following rules: Session polices always override global settings in the configuration Any attributes or parameters that are not set using a session policy are set on those established for the virtual server Any other attributes that are not set by a session policy or by the virtual server are set by the global configuration

The following instructions are general guidelines for creating session policies. Specific instructions for configuring session policies are located throughout this manual. The instructions might contain directions for configuring a specific setting; however, that setting can be one of many that are contained within a session profile and policy. The instructions in this manual direct you to create a setting within a session profile and then apply the profile to a session policy. You can change settings within a profile and policy without creating a new session policy. In addition, you can create all of your settings on a global level and then create a session policy to override global settings.
To create a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. Complete the settings for the session profile and click Create. In the Create Session Profile dialog box, add an expression for the policy, click Create, and click Close.

Note: In the expression select True value so the policy is always applied to the level where it is bound.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

95

Creating a Session Profile

A session profile contains the settings for client connections. Profiles are used with session policies. You can create profiles separately from the policy using the configuration utility and then use the profile for multiple policies. Only one profile can be used with a policy. You can also create a profile using the Access Gateway Policy Manager when configuring a session policy. Within the session profile, you can configure: The DNS servers The settings for client connections, including the plug-in with which users connect including time-out settings, split tunneling, and single sign-on

Session profiles specify the actions that are applied to a user session if the policy expression conditions are met. You can use session profiles to configure the following network settings: DNS server WINS server IP address Using the mapped IP address as the client IP address Intranet IP address (also called IP pooling) Intranet IP DNX suffix Spoof intranet IP address HTTP ports Forced time-out settings

The following settings are used for when users log on to the appliance: Access Interface or customized home page Web address for Web-based email, such as Outlook Web Access Windows plug-in type (Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows or Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX) Plug-in type (Access Gateway Plug-in or Access Gateway Plug-in for Java) Split tunneling Session and idle time-out settings Clientless access

96

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Clientless access URL encoding Single sign-on to Web Applications Credential index for authentication Single sign-on with Windows Logon scripts Client debug settings Split DNS Access to private network IP addresses and local LAN access Client choices Client cleanup behavior Proxy settings

For more information about configuring settings for client connections, see Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in on page 193. The following are security settings that can be configured using a session profile: Default authorization action (allow or deny) Quarantine groups Authorization groups

For more information about configuring authorization on the Access Gateway, see Configuring Authorization on page 144. The following are settings for connections to servers running Citrix XenApp or XenDesktop: ICA proxy, which are client connections using Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps Web Interface address Web Interface portal mode Single sign-on to the server farm domain

For more information about configuring settings for connecting to published applications in a server farm, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

97

To create a session profile

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. In the details pane, click the Profiles tab and click Add. Configure the settings for the profile, click Create and click Close.

When a profile is created, you can include it in a session policy.

To add a profile to a session policy

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. On the Policies tab, do one of the following: Click Add to create a new session policy. -orSelect a policy and click Open.

3. 4.

In Request Profile, select a profile from the list. Finish configuring the session policy and exit the dialog box.

For more information about using session policies for client connections and configuring the settings, see Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in on page 193.

Binding Session Policies

After creating the session policy, bind it to a user, group, virtual server, or globally. Session polices are applied as a hierarchy in the following order: Users Groups Virtual servers Globally

To bind a session policy

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Session Policies and click a policy. Drag the session policy to the user, group, virtual server, or Access Gateway global session policy under Configured Policies / Resources.

98

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

How a Traffic Policy Works

Traffic policies allow you to configure traffic policies for client connections. This policy includes: Enforcing shorter time-outs for sensitive applications that are accessed from untrusted networks. Switching network traffic to use TCP for some applications. If TCP is selected, you need to enable or disable single sign-on for certain applications. Identifying situations where you want to use other HTTP features for Access Gateway Plug-in traffic. Defining the file extensions that are used with file type association.

Creating a Traffic Policy

To configure a traffic policy, you create a profile and configure the following parameters: Protocol (HTTP or TCP) Application time-out Single sign-on to Web applications File type association Repeater Plug-in

When the traffic policy is created, you can bind the policy to virtual servers, users, groups or globally. For example, you have the Web application PeopleSoft Human Resources installed on a server in the internal network. You can create a traffic policy for this application that defines the destination IP address, the destination port, and set the amount of time a user can stay logged on to the application, such as 15 minutes. If you want to configure other features, such as HTTP compression to an application, you can use a traffic policy to configure the settings. When creating the policy, use the HTTP parameter for the action. In the expression, create the destination address for the server running the application.
To create a traffic policy

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Traffic Policies.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

99

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Under Related Tasks, click Create new traffic policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. In Protocol, select either HTTP or TCP. Note: If you select TCP as the protocol, single sign-on cannot be configured and is disabled in the profile dialog box.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

To limit the time users can stay logged on to the Web application, in AppTimeout (mins), type the number of minutes. To enable single sign-on to the Web application, in Single Sign-On, select ON. To specify a file type association, in File Type Association, select ON and click Create. To use the Repeater Plug-in to optimize network traffic, in WanScaler, select ON. In the Create Traffic Policy dialog box, create or add an expression, click Create and click Close.

Binding a Traffic Policy

Traffic policies can be bound to virtual servers, groups, users, and Access Gateway global. You can bind a traffic policy using either the Access Gateway Policy Manager or the configuration utility.
To bind a traffic policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2.

Under Available Policies / Resources, expand Traffic Policies and click a traffic policy. Drag the policy to Traffic Policies under Configured Policies / Resources for the level to which you want the policy bound.

To bind a traffic policy globally using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies > Traffic. In the details pane, select a policy and click Global Bindings. In the Bind / Unbind Traffic Policies dialog box, under Active, select the policy and click OK.

100

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Removing Traffic Policies

You can remove traffic policies from the Access Gateway using either the configuration utility or the Access Gateway Policy Manager. If you are using the configuration utility to remove a traffic policy and the policy is bound to the user, group, or virtual server level, you must first unbind the policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager.
To unbind a traffic policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1.

Under Configured Policies / Resources, expand the node that has the traffic policy bound to it, click Traffic Policies, and then click the traffic policy. Under Related Tasks, click Unbind traffic policy.

2.

After the traffic policy is unbound, you can remove the policy.
To remove a traffic policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2.

Under Available Policies / Resources, expand Traffic Policies and select the traffic policy. Under Related Tasks, click Remove traffic policy.

Allowing File Type Association

File type association allows users to open documents in applications published through Citrix XenApp. You can use this permission to allow users to open and edit documents on servers in the trusted environment and avoid sending the document to the users client device. You can use file type association only for document types that are associated with a published application and only if the virtual server properties on the Access Gateway are correctly configured. Providing file type association as the only means for editing resource documents can heighten security because it requires that editing occur on the server and not on the client device. For example, you might choose to grant file type association for a file share where employees post reports of ongoing project meetings, without providing the ability to download or upload. Providing file type association requires that: Users run Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps on the client device Users connect through a virtual server that has a traffic policy bound to it and is configured for XenApp Users are assigned to the desired applications in XenApp

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

101

Administrators configure XenApp to work with Access Gateway Enterprise Edition

The steps for creating file type association include: Creating a Web Interface site Configuring file type association using a traffic policy on the Access Gateway Defining file extensions in XenApp

Creating a Web Interface Site

To configure the Web Interface to work with file type association, you first create the Web Interface site. The Web Interface site can be in Direct or Advanced Access Control. Copy the following directories to your Web Interface site: app_data auth site

Note: When you copy these directories to the Web Interface site, the existing directories are overwritten. If you are using Web Interface 4.6 or 5.0, open the [Link] file in the Web Interface site directory and add the following code. You can download this code from the Citrix Support site at [Link]
<location path="site/[Link]"> <[Link]> <httpHandlers> <add verb="*" path="*.ica" type="[Link]"/ > </httpHandlers> </[Link]> </location> <location path="site/[Link]"> <[Link]> <httpHandlers> <add verb="*" path="*.rad" type="[Link]"/ >

102

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

</httpHandlers> </[Link]> </location>

This code must be added after the following section in the [Link] file:
<location path="site/[Link]"> <[Link]> <httpHandlers> <add verb="*" path="*.rad" type="[Link]"/> </httpHandlers> </[Link]> </location>

Configuring the Access Gateway for File Type Association

After creating and configuring the Web Interface, you need to create settings on the Access Gateway. The steps include: Creating a new virtual server or using an existing one. For more information about creating a virtual server, see Creating Additional Virtual Servers on page 53. Creating a new session policy and profile that has the Web Interface configured. Binding the session policy to the virtual server. Creating a traffic policy.

To create a session policy and profile for file type association

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Published Applications tab, configure the following settings: A. Next to Web Interface Address, click Override Global and type the Web address of the Web Interface.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

103

B. C.

Next to Web Interface Portal Mode, click Override Global and select either Normal or Compact. Next to Single Sign-on Domain, click Override Global and type the name of the domain in which the user accounts reside and click Create.

7.

In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expression, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

After creating the session policy and binding it to the virtual server, create the traffic policy and also bind it to the virtual server. When you configure a traffic policy for file type association, create an expression to define the file extensions to be used. For example, you want to enable file type association for Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel. An example expression is:
[Link] == /*.doc || [Link] == /*.xls

First, create the traffic profile for file type association. Then, create a traffic policy using the profile and creating the expression. Create both the policy and the profile using the configuration utility. Note: When creating a traffic profile for file type association, the protocol must be HTTP.

To create a traffic profile for file type association

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Traffic. In the details pane, on the Profiles tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the profile. In File Type Association, select ON and click Create.

After you create the profile, create the policy and add the profile.
To configure file type association using a traffic policy

1. 2. 3. 4.

On the Policies tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the policy. In the Create Traffic Policy dialog box, under Expressions, select Advanced Free-Form and click Add. In the Add Expression dialog box, do the following: A. In Expression Type, click General.

104

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

B. C. D. E. F. 5. 6.

In Flow Type, select REQ. In Protocol, select HTTP. In Qualifier, select URL. In Operator, select = =. In Value, type /*.FileExtensionType, where .FileExtensionType is the file type, such as .doc or .xls, and click OK.

In the Create Traffic Policy dialog box, under Expressions, next to Advanced Free-Form, click OR. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each file extension you want to include, click Create, and click Close.

When the policy is created, it should appear as in the following illustration:

Traffic policy for file type association

Configuring Citrix XenApp for File Type Association

For each published application, examine the properties you want to use with file type association. Enable each file extension using the published applications content redirection properties. In the following illustration, Microsoft Word is a published application and all of its file extensions are enabled.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

105

Enabling file extensions in Citrix XenApp After file extensions are enabled in XenApp, file type association is enabled and functional with Access Gateway.

How TCP Compression Policies Work

You can compress TCP data that goes through the Access Gateway using a TCP compression policy. You can enable compression of network traffic that is destined for one port or to a range of ports. A TCP compression policy is used with the Access Gateway Plug-in. TCP data on the client device is intercepted and the configured policy is applied before the data is sent through the secure tunnel. Network traffic from the internal network, that is sent to the client device, is also compressed. When network data is compressed, it can increase the performance of TCP-based applications with compressible content. When a TCP compression policy is configured and bound, it can help with:

106

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Wide area network (WAN) latency reduction. The number of round trips of the network traffic is reduced due to the reduced number of packets after compression. Reduce bandwidth costs. The bandwidth requirements of the site are reduced, resulting in lower expenses. Faster transmission. Transmission of compressed data is between the Access Gateway and the client device. The server in the internal network is free from transmitting the data.

The Access Gateway combines compression with the SSL acceleration feature to ensure continuous delivery of secure content without compromising performance. The Access Gateway supports the following compression methods: GNU zip (GZIP) Deflate Compress No compression

When a TCP compression profile is configured and saved, the parameters cannot be changed. If you want to change the profile for a TCP compression policy, create a new profile and then select it in the policy.

Creating a TCP Compression Policy

You can create a TCP compression policy using either the Access Gateway Policy Manager or the configuration utility. To configure a policy, you create a compression profile that selects the type of compression and then an expression for the policy. For example, you can create a policy using GZIP compression to a destination port, as shown in the following illustration:

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

107

A configured TCP compression policy with the profile configured to use GZIP and the destination ports for the expression In this illustration, traffic from the client device to all destination ports other than 22 and 443 are compressed using GZIP. TCP compression policies are bound to the Access Gateway globally.
To create a TCP compression policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click TCP Compression Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new TCP compression policy. In Policy Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Action, click New to create the profile. In the Create Compression Action dialog box, in Name, type a name for the profile. Under Compression Type, select the compression type and click Create. Configure the expression, click Create, and click Close.

After you create a TCP compression policy, you can modify the policy at a later time using the Access Gateway Policy Manager. Note: When a TCP compression profile is created, after it is saved it cannot be modified. To use different settings, create a new profile and bind it to the policy.

108

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To modify a TCP compression policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2. 3.

Under Available Policies / Resources, click TCP Compression Policies and then select a policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify TCP compression policy. Make the changes to the policy and click OK.

Note: TCP compression policies are bound only at the global level.

To bind a TCP compression policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2. 3.

Under Configure Policies / Resources, expand Access Gateway Global. Under Available Policies / Resources, click TCP Compression Policies and then click a policy. Drag the policy to TCP Compression Policies under Access Gateway Global.

You can also bind the policy globally using the configuration utility.
To bind a TCP compression policy using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway > Policies > TCP Compression. In the details pane, select a policy and click Global Bindings. Under Available, select the policy, and click OK.

You can remove TCP compression policies from the Access Gateway. If the policy is bound, the binding must be removed before the policy can be removed from the appliance.
To unbind a TCP compression policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2. 3.

Under Configured Policies / Resources, expand the node for Access Gateway Global. Expand the node for TCP Compression Policies and select a policy. Under Related Tasks, click Unbind TCP compression policy.

After the policy binding is removed, you can remove the policy.

Chapter 7

Configuring Policies and Profiles on the Access Gateway

109

To remove a TCP compression policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2.

Under Available Policies / Resources, expand the node for TCP Compression Policies. Select a policy and under Related Tasks, click Remove TCP compression policy.

Monitoring TCP Compression on Client Connections

You can monitor the compression rate of client connections from the Access Gateway Plug-in. In the Configuration dialog box, you can monitor the following items: The port the traffic is sent through The size of uncompressed data The size of compressed data The bandwidth savings The compression ratio

To monitor compression traffic using the Access Gateway Plug-in

1. 2.

On the client device, in the notification area, right-click the Access Gateway icon and click Configure Access Gateway. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Compression tab.

110

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

C HAPTER 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

Authentication allows users to log on to the Access Gateway and connect to resources in the internal network. Authentication provides security for your internal network and is configured using policies. After authentication is configured, you can add the policy globally or to virtual servers. In This Chapter Configuring Authentication on the Access Gateway Configuring Local Users Configuring Groups How Authentication Policies Work Configuring LDAP Authentication Configuring RADIUS Authentication Configuring the Access Gateway to Use One-Time Passwords Configuring NTLM Authentication Configuring TACACS+ Authentication Configuring Client Certificate Authentication Configuring Multifactor Authentication Disabling Authentication Configuring the Number of User Sessions Configuring Authentication for Specific Times Configuring Authorization Configuring LDAP Group Extraction Configuring RADIUS Group Extraction

112

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring LDAP Group Extraction for Multiple Domains

Configuring Authentication on the Access Gateway

The Access Gateway employs a flexible authentication design that permits extensive customization of client authentication for the Access Gateway. You can use industry-standard authentication servers and configure the Access Gateway to authenticate users with the servers. The Access Gateway also supports authentication based on attributes present in a client certificate. Access Gateway authentication incorporates local authentication for the creation of local users and groups. This design centers around the use of policies to control the authentication procedures that you configure. The policies you create can be applied at the Access Gateway global or virtual server levels and can be used to set authentication server parameters conditionally based on the clients source network. Because policies are bound either globally or to a virtual server, you can also assign priorities to your policies to create a cascade of multiple authentication servers as part of authentication. Access Gateway authentication is designed to accommodate simple authentication procedures that use a single source for client authentication as well as more complex, cascaded authentication procedures that rely upon multiple authentication types. The authentication type is defined within the policy, to force unconditional, or always-true evaluation, of the policy.

Authentication Types Supported on the Access Gateway

The Access Gateway supports the following authentication types: Local Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) RADIUS NTLM on Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 Server TACACS+ Client certificate authentication.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

113

The Access Gateway also supports RSA SecurID, SafeWord products, and Gemalto Protiva. Authentication using these products is configured using a RADIUS server. You can also configure smartcard authentication using client certificates.

Configuring Default Global Authentication Types

When you installed the Access Gateway and used the Access Gateway wizard, you configured authentication during the wizard. This authentication policy is bound automatically to the Access Gateway global level. The authentication type you configure during the Access Gateway wizard becomes the default authentication type. You can change the default authorization type by running the Access Gateway wizard again or using the global authentication settings in the configuration utility. If you need to add additional authentication types, you can configure authentication globally on the Access Gateway. When authentication is configured globally, you define the type of authentication, configure the settings, and set the maximum number of users that can be authenticated. After configuring and binding the policy, you can set the priority to override the authentication type configured in the Access Gateway wizard.
To configure global authentication

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Authentication, click authentication settings. In Maximum Number of Users, type the number of users who can be authenticated using this authentication type. In Default Authentication Type, select the authentication type. Configure the settings for your authentication type and click OK.

Configuring Authentication without Authorization

Authorization defines the resources users are allowed to connect to through the Access Gateway. Authorization policies are configured using an expression and then setting the policy to be allowed or denied. You can configure the Access Gateway to use authentication only, without authorization. When authentication is configured without authorization, the Access Gateway does not perform a group authorization check. The policies configured for the user or group are assigned to the user. For more information about configuring authorization, see Configuring Authorization on page 144.

114

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Local Users

You can create user accounts locally on the Access Gateway to supplement the users on authentication servers. For example, you might want to create local user accounts for temporary users, such as consultants or visitors, without creating an entry for those users on the authentication server. If you are using local authentication, create users and then add them to groups that are created on the Access Gateway. After configuring users and groups, you can apply authorization and session policies, create bookmarks, specify applications, and specify the IP address of file shares and servers to which the user has access.
To create local users

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click Users. Under Related Tasks, click Create new user. In User Name, type the user name. If using local authentication, click to clear External Authentication and in Password and Confirm Password, type the password for the user, click Create, and click Close. Note: Select External Authentication to have users authenticate against an external authentication server, such as LDAP or RADIUS. Clear the check box to have the Access Gateway authenticate against the local user database.

After creating a local user you can change the users password or configure the user account to be authenticated against an external authentication server.
To change a users password

1. 2. 3.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Users and click the user name. Under Related Tasks, click Modify user. In Password and Confirm Password, type the new password for the user, click Create and click Close.

If you have users who are configured for local authentication, you can change the authentication to an external authentication server. To do this, enable external authentication.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

115

To change a users authentication method

1. 2. 3.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click the user name. Under Related Tasks, click Modify user. Select External Authentication and click OK.

You can also remove a user from the Access Gateway.

To remove a user

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click the user name. Under Related Tasks, click Remove user and click Yes.

When the user is removed from the Access Gateway, all associated policies are also removed.

Configuring Groups
You can have groups on the Access Gateway that are local groups and can authenticate users with local authentication. If you are using external servers for authentication, groups on the Access Gateway are configured to match groups configured on authentication servers in the internal network. When a user logs on and is authenticated, if a group name matches a group on an authentication server, the user inherits the settings for the group on the Access Gateway. After configuring groups, you can apply authorization and session policies, create bookmarks, specify applications, and specify the IP address of file shares and servers to which the user has access. If you are using local authentication, create users and add them to groups that are configured on the Access Gateway. The users then inherit the settings for that group.

Important: If users are a member of an Active Directory group, the name of the group on the Access Gateway must be the same as the Active Directory group.

To create a group

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click Groups.

116

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3.

Under Related Tasks, click Create new group. In Group Name, type the group name, click Create, and click Close.

You can also delete user groups from the Access Gateway.
To delete a group

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Groups and select a user group. Under Related Tasks, click Remove group.

Adding Users to Groups

You can add users to a group either during creation of the group or at a later time. You can add users to multiple groups so users can inherit the policies and settings that are bound to those groups.
To add users to a group

1. 2. 3.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click Groups and select a user group. Under Related Tasks, click Modify group. On the Users tab, under Available Users, select the users, click Add and click OK.

To add a user to multiple groups, follow the procedure above.

Configuring Session Policies with Groups

In your configuration, you might have users that belong to more than one group. In addition, each group might have one or more bound session policies, with different parameters configured. Users that belong to more than one group inherit the session policies assigned to all the groups to which the user belongs. To ensure which session policy evaluation takes precedence over the other, you must set the priority of the session policy. For example, you have group1 that is bound with a session policy configured with the home page as [Link]. Group2 is bound with a session policy configured with home page as [Link]. When these policies are bound to respective groups without a priority number or with same priority number, the home page that appears to users who belong to both the groups, depends on which policy is processed first. By setting a lower priority number, which gives higher precedence, for the session policy with home page as [Link], you can ensure that users who belong to both the groups will always receive [Link] as the home page.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

117

If session policies do not have a priority number assigned or have the same priority number, precedence is evaluated in the following order: User Group Virtual server Global

If policies are bound to the same level, without a priority number or have the same priority number, the order of evaluation is per the policy bind order. Policies that are bound first to a level receive precedence over those bound later.

How Authentication Policies Work

When users log on to the Access Gateway, they are authenticated by a policy. The policy defines the authentication type. A single authentication policy can be used for simple authentication needs. Multiple policies can also be configured and bound to create a detailed authentication procedure. An authentication policy is comprised of an expression and an action. Once created, an authentication policy can be bound either at the global level or to virtual servers. When at least one authentication policy is bound to a virtual server, any authentication polices bound to the global level are not used when users log on to the virtual server. When a user logs on to the Access Gateway, authentication is evaluated in the following order: The virtual server is checked for any bound authentication policies If authentication policies are not bound to the virtual server, global authentication policies are checked. If an authentication policy is not bound to a virtual server or globally, the user is authenticated using the default authorization type, which is local authentication

Configuring Authentication Profiles

You can create an authentication profile using the Access Gateway wizard, the configuration utility, or the Access Gateway Policy Manager. The profile contains all of the settings for the authentication policy.

118

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

With the Access Gateway wizard, you can configure authentication using the chosen authentication type. If you want to configure additional authentication policies after running the wizard, you can use the Access Gateway Policy Manager. For more information about the Access Gateway wizard, see How the Access Gateway Wizard Works on page 37.
To create an authentication policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select the authentication type. If you are using an external authentication type, next to Server, click New. Configure the settings for your authentication type and click Create. In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

You can modify configured authentication policies and profiles, such as changing the IP address of the authentication server or modifying the expression. Note: When an authentication type is selected and the authentication profile is saved, the authentication type cannot be changed.

To modify an authentication policy

1. 2. 3.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, select the authentication policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify authentication policy. In the Configure Authentication Policy dialog box, make the changes and click Close.

If you changed or removed an authentication server from your network, remove the corresponding authentication policy from the Access Gateway.
To remove an authentication policy

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, select the authentication policy. Under Related Tasks, click Remove authentication policy and click Yes.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

119

Binding Authentication Policies

When the authentication policies are configured, bind the policy either globally or to a virtual server. You can use either the configuration utility or the Access Gateway Policy Manager to bind an authentication policy
To bind an authentication policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2.

Under Available Policies / Resource, expand Authentication Policies and select a policy. Drag and drop the policy to the virtual server, System Global, or Access Gateway Global Authentication Policies under Configured Policies / Resources.

To bind an authentication policy globally using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. On the Policies tab, click Global Bindings. Under Active, select the check box for the policy you want bound and click OK.

If multiple authentication policies are configured on the Access Gateway, and the policies are bound at different levels, use the Access Gateway Policy Manager to find where authentication policies are bound. In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand the System Global, Access Gateway Global, or Virtual Servers node to see the authentication policies that are bound. You can also remove bound authentication policies using either the Access Gateway Policy Manager or the configuration utility.
To remove a bound authentication policy using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2.

Under Configured Policies / Resources, expand the node for the authentication policy. Under Related Tasks, click Unbind authentication policy and click Yes.

To unbind a global authentication policy using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. On the Policies tab, click Global Bindings. Under Active, click to clear the check box for the policy you want to unbind and click OK.

120

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Setting Priorities for Authentication Policies

Authentication polices are validated against those bound to the virtual server first and then globally. If you have an authentication policy bound globally and want it to take precedence over an authentication policy bound to a virtual server, you can change the priority number of the policy. Priority numbers start at zero. A lower priority number gives the authentication policy higher precedence. For example, if the global policy has a priority number of one and the virtual server has a priority of two, the global authentication policy is applied first. If a priority number is not assigned, the virtual server authentication policy is applied first and then the global policy.
To set the priority for global authentication policies

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. On the Policies tab, click Global Bindings. In the Bind/Unbind Authentication Global Polices dialog box, under Priority, select the number and click OK.

You can also modify an authentication policy that is bound to a virtual server.
To change the priority for an authentication policy bound to a virtual server

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Virtual Servers, expand a virtual server node, expand Authentication Policies, and select a policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify priority. In Priority, type the number of the priority and click OK.

2. 3.

Configuring LDAP Authentication

You can configure the Access Gateway to authenticate user access with one or more LDAP servers.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

121

By default, LDAP authentication is secure using SSL/TLS. There are two types of secure LDAP connections. With one type, the LDAP server accepts the SSL/ TLS connection on a port separate from the port used to accept clear LDAP connections. After a client establishes the SSL/TLS connection, LDAP traffic can be sent over the connection. The second type allows both unsecure and secure LDAP connections and is handled by a single port on the server. In this scenario, to create a secure connection, the client first establishes a clear LDAP connection. The LDAP command StartTLS is sent to the server over the connection. If the LDAP server supports StartTLS, the connection is converted to a secure LDAP connection using TLS. The port numbers for LDAP connections are: 389 is the standard LDAP port, including TLS 636 for secure LDAP connections 3268 for Microsoft unsecure LDAP connections 3269 for Microsoft secure LDAP connections

LDAP connections that use the StartTLS command use port number 389. If port numbers 389 or 3268 are configured on the Access Gateway, the Access Gateway tries to use StartTLS to make the connection. If any other port number is used, connection attempts are made using SSL/TLS. If StartTLS or SSL/TLS cannot be used, the connection fails. When configuring the LDAP server, the letter case must match on the server and on the Access Gateway. If the root directory of the LDAP server is specified, all of the subdirectories are also searched to find the user attribute. In large directories, this can affect performance. For this reason, Citrix recommends that you use a specific organizational unit (OU). The following table contains examples of user attribute fields for LDAP servers:
LDAP Server Microsoft Active Directory Server Novell eDirectory IBM Directory Server Lotus Domino Sun ONE directory (formerly iPlanet) User Attribute sAMAccountName cn uid CN uid or cn Yes Case Sensitive No Yes

122

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

This table contains examples of the base dn:

LDAP Server Microsoft Active Directory Server Novell eDirectory IBM Directory Server Lotus Domino Sun ONE directory (formerly iPlanet) OU=City, O=Citrix, C=US ou=People,dc=citrix,dc=com Base dn DC=citrix, DC=local dc=citrix,dc=net

The following table contains examples of bind dn:

LDAP Server Microsoft Active Directory Server Novell eDirectory IBM Directory Server Lotus Domino Sun ONE directory (formerly iPlanet) CN=Notes Administrator, O=Citrix, C=US uid=admin,ou=Administrators, ou=TopologyManagement,o=NetscapeRoot Bind dn CN=Administrator, CN=Users, DC=citrix, DC=local cn=admin, dc=citrix, dc=net

Note: For further information regarding LDAP server settings, see Determining Attributes in your LDAP Directory on page 124.

To configure LDAP authentication

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select LDAP. Next to Server, click New. In Name, type the name of the server. Under Server, in IP Address and Port, type the IP address and port number of the LDAP server. Under LDAP server information, complete the following:

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

123

In Base DN (location of users), type the base DN under which users are located. Base DN is usually derived from the Bind DN by removing the user name and specifying the group where users are located. Examples of syntax for base DN are: ou=users,dc=ace,dc=com cn=Users,dc=ace,dc=com

In Administrator Bind DN, type the administrator bind DN for queries to the LDAP directory. Examples for syntax of bind DN are: domain/user name ou=administrator,dc=ace,dc=com user@[Link] (for Active Directory) cn=Administrator,cn=Users,dc=ace,dc=com For Active Directory, the group name specified as cn=groupname is required. The group name that is defined in the Access Gateway must be identical to the group name that is defined on the LDAP server. For other LDAP directories, the group name either is not required or, if required, is specified as ou=groupname. The Access Gateway binds to the LDAP server using the administrator credentials and then searches for the user. After locating the user, the Access Gateway unbinds the administrator credentials and rebinds with the user credentials.

In Administrator Password and Confirm Administrator Password, type the administrator password for the LDAP server. In Server Logon Name Attribute, type the attribute under which the Access Gateway should look for user logon names for the LDAP server that you are configuring. The default is samAccountName. In Group Attribute, leave the default memberOf for Active Directory or change it to that of the LDAP server type you are using. This attribute enables the Access Gateway to obtain the groups associated with a user during authorization.

9. 10.

In Security Type, select the security type and click Create. Create an expression, click Create and click Close.

124

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Note: If you select Plaintext or TLS for security, use port number 389. If you select SSL, use port number 636.

A completed LDAP authentication configuration on the Access Gateway

Determining Attributes in your LDAP Directory

If you need help determining your LDAP directory attributes, you can easily look them up with the free LDAP browser from Softerra. You can download the LDAP browser from the Softerra LDAP Administrator Web site at [Link] In the LDAP browser, create a profile. After the profile is created, you can search for attributes. To look up the base DN, in the details pane, locate the namingContexts attribute. The value of that attribute is the base DN for your site. The base DN is typically dc=myDomain,dc=com (if your directory tree is based on Internet domain names) or ou=domain,o=myOrg,c=country.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

125

You can search through the LDAP browser to locate other attributes. For more information see the LDAP browser online Help.

Configuring RADIUS Authentication

You can configure the Access Gateway to authenticate user access with one or more RADIUS servers. If you are using RSA SecurID, SafeWord, or Gemalto Protiva products, each of these is configured using a RADIUS server. Your configuration might require using a network access server IP address (NAS IP) or a network access server identifier (NAS ID). When configuring your Access Gateway to use a RADIUS authentication server, use the following guidelines. If you enable use of the NAS IP, the appliance sends its configured IP address to the RADIUS server, rather than the source IP address used in establishing the RADIUS connection. If you configure the NAS ID, the appliance sends the identifier to the RADIUS server. If you do not configure the NAS ID, the appliance sends its host name to the RADIUS server. When the NAS IP is enabled, the appliance ignores any NAS ID that is configured using the NAS IP to communicate with the RADIUS server.

To configure RADIUS authentication

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Resources / Policies, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the RADIUS authentication policy. In Authentication Type, select RADIUS. Next to Server, click New. Under Server, in IP Address, type the IP address of the RADIUS server. In Port, type the port. The default is 1812. In Secret Key and Confirm Secret Key, type the RADIUS server secret. In NAS ID, type the identifier number and click Create. In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select the expression, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

126

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

After the RADIUS server settings are configured on the Access Gateway, bind the policy to make it active. This can be done either globally or to a virtual server. For more information about binding authentication policies, see Binding Authentication Policies on page 119.

Choosing RADIUS Authentication Protocols

The Access Gateway supports implementations of RADIUS that are configured to use several protocols for user authentication, including: Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAP Version 1 and Version 2)

If your deployment of the Access Gateway is configured to use RADIUS authentication and your RADIUS server is configured to use PAP, you can strengthen user authentication by assigning a strong shared secret to the RADIUS server. Strong RADIUS shared secrets consist of random sequences of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and punctuation and are at least 22 characters long. If possible, use a random character generation program to determine RADIUS shared secrets. To further protect RADIUS traffic, assign a different shared secret to each Access Gateway appliance or virtual server. When you define clients on the RADIUS server, you can also assign a separate shared secret to each client. If you do this, you must configure separately each Access Gateway policy that uses RADIUS authentication. Shared secrets are configured on the Access Gateway when a RADIUS policy is created.

Configuring IP Address Extraction

You can configure the Access Gateway to extract the IP address from a RADIUS server. When a user authenticates with the RADIUS server, the server returns a framed IP address that is assigned to the user. The following are components for IP address extraction: Allows a remote RADIUS server to supply an IP address from the internal network for a user logged on to the Access Gateway Allows configuration for any RADIUS attribute using the type ipaddress, including those that are vendor encoded

When configuring the RADIUS server for IP address extraction, you configure the vendor identifier and the attribute type.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

127

The vendor identifier enables the RADIUS server to assign an IP address to the client from a pool of IP addresses that are configured on the RADIUS server. The vendor ID and attributes are used to make the association between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS Server. The vendor ID is the attribute in the RADIUS response that provides the IP address of the internal network. A value of zero indicates that the attribute is not vendor encoded. The attribute type is the remote IP address attribute in a RADIUS response. The minimum value is one and the maximum value is 255. A common configuration is to extract the RADIUS attribute framed IP address. The vendor ID is set to zero or is not specified. The attribute type is set to eight.
To configure IP address extraction

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, select a RADIUS authentication policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify authentication policy. In the Configure Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Server, click Modify. Under Details, in Vendor Identifier, type the value. In Attribute Type, type the value, and click OK twice.

Configuring the Access Gateway to Use One-Time Passwords

You can configure the Access Gateway to use one-time passwords, such as a token personal identification number (PIN) or passcode. After the passcode or PIN is used, it is immediately invalidated by the authentication server and cannot be used again. Products that include using a one-time password include RSA SecurID, Impritavas OneSign, SafeWord, and Gemalto Protiva. To use each of these products, configure the authentication server in the internal network to use RADIUS.

Configuring RSA SecurID Authentication

When configuring the RSA/ACE server, you need to complete the following on the RSA/ACE server: Configure the RADIUS client with the following information: Provide the name of the Access Gateway appliance

128

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Provide a description (not mandatory) Provide the system IP address Provide the shared secret between Access Gateway and the RADIUS server Configure the make/model as Standard Radius

In the agent host configuration, you need the following information: Provide the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Access Gateway (as it appears on the certificate bound to the virtual server). After providing the FQDN, click the tab button and the Network Address window populates itself. When the FQDN is entered, the network address automatically appears. If it does not, enter the system IP address. Provide the Agent Type using Communication Server. Configure to import all users or a set of users that are allowed to authenticate through the Access Gateway.

If it is not already configured, create an Agent Host entry for the RADIUS server, including the following information: Provide the FQDN of the RSA server. When the FQDN is entered, the network address automatically appears. If it does not, provide the IP address of the RSA server. Provide the Agent Type, which is the RADIUS Server.

For more information about configuring an RSA RADIUS server, see the manufacturers documentation. To configure RSA SecurID, create an authentication profile and policy and then bind the policy globally or to a virtual server. To create a RADIUS policy to use RSA SecurID, see Configuring RADIUS Authentication on page 125. After creating the authentication policy, bind it to a virtual server or globally. For more information, see Binding Authentication Policies on page 119.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

129

Configuring Password Return with RADIUS

You can replace domain passwords with a one-time password generated by a hardware token from a RADIUS server. When users log on to the Access Gateway, they use a personal identification number (PIN) and the passcode from the token. When their credentials are validated, the RADIUS server returns the users Windows password to the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway accepts the response from the server and then uses the returned password for single signon instead of using the passcode that users type during logon. This allows you to configure single sign-on without requiring users to know their Windows password. To enable single sign-on using returned passwords, you configure a RADIUS authentication policy on the Access Gateway using the Password Vendor Indentifier and Password Attribute Type parameters. These two parameters return the users Windows password to the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway supports Imprivata OneSign Version 4.0 with service pack 3 or later.
To configure single sign-on for a one-time password

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Resources / Policies, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the RADIUS authentication policy. In Authentication Type, select RADIUS. Next to Server, click New. Configure the settings for the RADIUS server. In Password Vendor Identifier, type the vendor identifier that is returned by the RADIUS server. This must have a minimum value of 1. The default password vendor identifier for Imprivata OneSign is 398. In Password Attribute Type, type the attribute type that is returned by the RADIUS server in the vendor-specific AVP code. The value can range from 1 to 255. The default password attribute type code for Imprivata OneSign is 5. In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select the expression, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

8.

9.

130

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring SafeWord Authentication

The SafeWord product line provides secure authentication using a token-based passcode. After the passcode is used, it is immediately invalidated by SafeWord and cannot be used again. If the Access Gateway is replacing the Secure Gateway in a Secure Gateway and Web Interface deployment, you can choose to not configure authentication on the Access Gateway and continue to allow the Web Interface to provide SafeWord authentication for incoming HTTP traffic. For more information about configuring the Web Interface, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop. The Access Gateway supports SafeWord authentication to the following products: SafeWord PremierAccess SafeWord for Citrix SafeWord RemoteAccess SafeWord 2008

Configuring the Access Gateway to authenticate using SafeWord products can be done in several ways: Configure authentication to use a PremierAccess RADIUS server that is installed as part of SafeWord PremierAccess and allow it to handle authentication. Configure authentication to use the SafeWord IAS agent, which is a component of SafeWord RemoteAccess, SafeWord for Citrix, and SafeWord PremierAccess 4.0. Install the SafeWord Web Interface Agent to work with the Citrix Web Interface. Authentication does not have to be configured on the Access Gateway and can be handled by the Web Interface. This configuration does not use the PremierAccess RADIUS server or the SafeWord IAS Agent.

When configuring the SafeWord RADIUS server, you need the following information: The IP address of the Access Gateway. This should be the same as that configured on the RADIUS server client configuration. A shared secret. The IP address and port of the SafeWord server.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

131

Configure a SafeWord policy to authenticate users. The Access Gateway acts as a SafeWord agent authenticating on behalf of users logged on using the Access Gateway Plug-in. To configure SafeWord authentication on the Access Gateway, follow the steps for configuring a RADIUS server. For more information, see Configuring RADIUS Authentication on page 125.

Configuring Gemalto Protiva Authentication

Protiva is a strong authentication platform that was developed to use the strengths of Gemaltos smart card authentication. With Protiva, users log on with a user name, password, and one-time password generated by the Protiva device. Similar to RSA SecurID, the authentication request is sent to the Protiva Authentication Server and the password is either validated or rejected. To configure Gemalto Protiva to work with the Access Gateway, use the following guidelines: Install the Protiva server. For more information, see the product documentation. Install the Protiva Internet Authentication Server (IAS) agent plug-in on a Microsoft IAS RADIUS server. Make sure you note the IP address and port number of the IAS server. Configure a policy on the Access Gateway to use RADIUS authentication and enter the settings of the Protiva server.

If authentication on the Access Gateway is configured to use a one-time password with RADIUS, such as provided by an RSA SecurID token, the Access Gateway attempts to reauthenticate users using the cached password. This occurs when changes are made to the Access Gateway or if the connection between the Access Gateway Plug-in and the Access Gateway is interrupted and then restored. This can also occur when connections are configured to use Citrix XenApp Plugin for Hosted Apps and connect to the Web Interface using RADIUS or LDAP. When a user starts an application and uses it, then returns to the Web Interface to start another application, the Access Gateway uses cached information to authenticate the user.

Configuring NTLM Authentication

You can configure the Access Gateway to use Windows NT LAN Manager (NTLM) authentication to authenticate users against the user database on a Windows NT 4.0 domain controller or to a Windows 2000 Server.

132

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If you need to configure the Access Gateway to authenticate clients against a Windows NT 4.0 primary or backup domain controller, you need to specify the server IP address, the domain name, the domain administrator user name and password of the person who is authorized to administer the domain. These parameters are necessary because the Access Gateway joins the domain to communicate authentication data.
To configure NTLM authentication

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select NT4. Next to Server, click New. Complete the settings as they are configured on your Windows NT 4.0 server and click Create. Next to Named Expressions, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

When the settings for Windows NT 4.0 authentication are configured, bind the authentication policy to a virtual server or globally. For more information, see Binding Authentication Policies on page 119.

Configuring TACACS+ Authentication

You can configure a TACACS+ server for authentication. Similar to RADIUS authentication, TACACS+ uses a secret key, an IP address, and the port number. The default port number is 49. To configure the Access Gateway to use a TACACS+ server, provide the server IP address and the TACACS+ secret. The port needs to be specified only when the server port number in use is something other than the default port number of 49.
To configure a TACACS+ server

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create Authentication Policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select TACACS.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

133

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Next to Server, click New. Under Server, type the IP address and port number of the TACACS+ server. Under TACACS server information, in TACACS Key and Confirm TACACS key, type the key. In Authorization, select ON and click Create. In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

After the TACACS+ server settings are configured on the Access Gateway, bind the policy to make it active. This can be done on either the global or virtual server level. For more information about binding authentication policies, see Binding Authentication Policies on page 119.

Configuring Client Certificate Authentication

Users logging on to an Access Gateway virtual server can also be authenticated based on the attributes of the client certificate that is presented to the Access Gateway virtual server. This can also be used with another authentication type, such as LDAP or RADIUS, to provide double-source authentication. To authenticate users based on the client-side certificate attributes, client authentication should be enabled on the virtual server and the client certificate should be requested. A root certificate must be bound to the virtual server on the Access Gateway. When users log on to the Access Gateway virtual server, after authentication, the user name information is extracted from the specified field of the certificate. Typically, this field is Subject:CN. If the user name is extracted successfully, the user is then authenticated. If the user does not provide a valid certificate during the SSL handshake or if the user name extraction fails, the authentication fails. You can authenticate users based on the client certificate by setting the default authentication type to use the client certificate. You can also create a certificate action that defines what is to be done during the authentication based on a client SSL certificate.
To configure the client certificate as the default authentication type

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway > Global Settings. Under Settings, click Change authentication settings.

134

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

3. 4. 5. 6.

In Maximum Number of Users, type the number of users who can be authenticated using the client certificate. In Default Authentication Type, select Cert. In User Name Field, type the name of the certificate field that holds the user names. In Group Name Field, type the name of the certificate field that holds the group name and click OK.

You can also create a client certificate authentication policy and bind it to a virtual server. This policy takes precedence over the global policy and can be used to restrict access to specific groups or users.
To configure a client certificate authentication policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policy. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select Cert. Next to Server, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. Next to Two Factor, select OFF. In User Name Field and Group Name Field, enter the values and click Create. Note: If you previously configured client certificates as the default authentication type, use the same names as for the policy. If you completed the User Name Field and Group Name Field for the default authentication type, use the same values for the profile.

9.

In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select an expression, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

When the client certificate authentication policy is configured, you can bind it to a virtual server.
To bind a client certificate policy to a virtual server

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

135

2. 3. 4.

In the details pane, select a virtual server from the list and click Open. In the Configure Access Gateway Virtual Server dialog box, click the Authentication tab. Under Active, select the check box next to the certificate authentication policy and click OK.

When you want to use a client certificate for authentication, you must configure the virtual server so that client certificates are requested during the SSL handshake.
To configure a virtual server to request the client certificate

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the right-pane, select a virtual server and click Open. On the Certificates tab, click SSL Parameters. Under Others, click Client Authentication. In Client Certificate, select Optional or Mandatory and click OK twice.

Select Optional if you want to allow other authentication types on the same virtual server and do not require the use of client certificates.

Extracting the User Name from the Client Certificate

If client certificate authentication is enabled on the Access Gateway, users are authenticated based on certain attributes of the client certificate. After authentication is completed successfully, the user name or the user and group name of the user are extracted from the certificate and any policies specified for that user are applied.

Configuring Two-Factor Client Certificate Authentication

You can configure a client certificate to authenticate users first and then require users to log on using a secondary authentication type, such as LDAP or RADIUS. In this scenario, users are authenticated with the client certificate first and then they are presented with a logon page where they can enter their user name and password. When the SSL handshake is complete, the logon sequence can take either of the following paths. Neither the user name nor the group is extracted from the certificate. The user is presented with the logon page and is requested to provide valid logon credentials. The credentials provided are authenticated as in the case of normal password authentication and the required information is obtained.

136

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The user name and group name are extracted from the client certificate. If only the user name is extracted, the user is presented with a logon page where the logon name is present and cannot be modified. Only the password field is left blank.

Group information that is extracted during the second round of authentication is appended to the group information extracted from the certificate (if any).

Configuring a Client Certificate as a Secondary Method of Authentication

If users are authenticated using two authentication types, you can configure the certificate authentication policy as the second method of authentication. For example, you use LDAP as your primary authentication type. Users log on using their user name and password.

Configuring a Smart Card

You can configure the Access Gateway to use a cryptographic smart card to authenticate users. To configure a smart card to work with the Access Gateway, you need to do the following: Create a certificate authentication policy. For more information, see Configuring Client Certificate Authentication on page 133. Bind the authentication policy to a virtual server. Add the root certificate of the CA issuing the client certificates to the Access Gateway. For more information, see To install a root certificate on the Access Gateway on page 141. Bind the root certificate to the virtual server. For more information, see To add a root certificate to a virtual server on page 141. Configure the Access Gateway for client certificate authentication.

When the client certificate is created, you can flash the certificate onto the smart card. When that is completed, test the smart card. To configure a client certificate on the Access Gateway, see To configure a client certificate authentication policy on page 134.
To test smart card authentication

1. 2.

Connect the smart card to the client device. Open your Web browser and log on to the Access Gateway.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

137

Configuring a Common Access Card

Common access cards are used by the United States Department of Defense for identification and authentication.
To configure authentication for common access cards

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. On the Servers tab, click Add. In Name, type a name. In Authentication Type, select CERT. In User Name Field, type the following: SubjectAltName:PrincipalName and click Create.

6.

On the Policies tab, create a policy that uses this server and then bind the policy to the virtual server.

Configuring Multifactor Authentication

There are two types of multifactor authentication: Cascading authentication that sets the authentication priority level Double-source authentication that requires users to log on using two types of authentication

Setting Priorities for Authentication Policies

Authentication allows you to create a cascade of multiple authentication servers using policy prioritization. When a cascade is configured, the system traverses each authentication server defined by the cascaded policies to validate a clients credentials. Prioritized authentication policies are cascaded in ascending order and can have priority values from the range of 1 to 9999. You define these priorities when binding your policies at either the global or the virtual server level.

138

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

During authentication, when a user logs on, the virtual server is checked first and then global authentication policies are checked. If a user belongs to an authentication policy on both the virtual server and globally, the policy from the virtual server is applied first and then the global authentication policy. If you want users to receive the authentication policy that is bound globally, change the priority of the policy. When a global authentication policy has a priority number of one and an authentication policy bound to a virtual server has a priority number two, the global authentication policy takes precedence. For example, you could have three authentication policies bound to the virtual server and set the priority of each policy If a user fails to authenticate against a policy in the primary cascade, or if that user succeeds in authenticating against a policy in the primary cascade but fails to authenticate against a policy in the secondary cascade, the authentication process stops and the user is redirected to an error page. Note: Citrix recommends that when multiple policies are bound to a virtual server or globally, define unique priorities for all authentication policies.

To set the priority for global authentication policies

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. On the Policies tab, click Global Bindings. In the Bind/Unbind Authentication Global Polices dialog box, under Priority, select the number and click OK.

You can also modify an authentication policy that is bound to a virtual server.
To change the priority for an authentication policy bound to a virtual server

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Virtual Servers, expand a virtual server node, expand Authentication Policies, and select a policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify priority. In Priority, type the number.

2. 3.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

139

Configuring Double-Source Authentication

The Access Gateway supports double-source authentication. Normally, when authenticating users, the Access Gateway stops the authentication process as soon as it successfully authenticates a user employing any one of the configured authentication methods. In certain instances, you may need to authenticate a user to one server, but extract groups from a different server. For example, if your network authenticates users against a RADIUS server, but you also use RSA SecurID key authentication and user groups are stored on that server, you may need to authenticate users to that server so you can extract the groups.
To configure double-source authentication using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. In the details pane, click Global Bindings. In Bound To, select Primary or Secondary. When you select one of these settings, when users log on, two password fields appear for double-source authentication.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Next to the authentication policy, select Active and click OK. Click Global Bindings. In Bound To, select Secondary. Next to the authentication policy, select Active and click OK.

Selecting the Authentication Type for Single Sign-On

If you have single sign-on and double-source authentication configured on the Access Gateway, you can select which password to use for single sign-on. For example, you have LDAP configured as the primary authentication type and RADIUS configured as the secondary authentication [Link] users access resources that require single sign-on, the user name and primary password are sent by default. You set which password should be used for single sign-on to Web applications within a session profile.
To configure the authentication type used for single sign-on

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. In the details pane, click the Profile tab and do one of the following: To create a new profile, click Add To modify an existing profile, click Open

140

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

3.

On the Client Experience tab, next to Credential Index, click Override Global, select either the primary or secondary password and click OK.

Using Certificates and LDAP Authentication

You can use a secure client certificate with LDAP authentication and authorization. For example, you are using smart card authentication with LDAP. The user logs on and then the user name is extracted from the client certificate. LDAP is the primary form of authentication and the client certificate is the secondary form. To use a client certificate, you must have an enterprise Certificate Authority, such as Certificate Services in Windows Server 2003, running on the same computer that is running Active Directory. You can create a client certificate using the Certificate Authority. To use a client certificate with LDAP authentication and authorization, it must be a secure certificate using SSL. To use secure client certificates for LDAP, the client certificate is installed on the client device and a corresponding root certificate on the Access Gateway. Before configuring a client certificate, do the following: Create a virtual server Create an LDAP authentication policy for the LDAP server Set the expression for the LDAP policy to True value

To configure a secure client certificate for LDAP

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select Cert. Next to Server, click New. In the Configure Authentication Server dialog box, in Name, type the name of the server. Next to Two Factor, select ON. In the User Name Field, type Subject:CN and click Create. In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

141

When the certificate authentication policy is created, bind the policy to the virtual server. After binding the certificate authentication policy, bind the LDAP authentication policy to the virtual server. Important: The certificate authentication policy must be bound to the virtual server before the LDAP authentication policy. After creating the policy, download and install a root certificate from your Certificate Authority in Base 64 format and save it on your computer. You can then upload the root certificate to the Access Gateway.
To install a root certificate on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand SSL and click Certificates. In the details pane, click Add. In Certificate - Key Pair Name, type a name for the certificate. Under Details, in File Location, select Local Computer, click Browse, navigate to the root certificate, and click Install.

After installing the root certificate on the Access Gateway, add it to the certificate store of the virtual server.
To add a root certificate to a virtual server

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Virtual Servers and select the virtual server. Under Related Tasks, click Modify virtual server. On the Certificates tab, under Available, select the certificate, click Add as CA, and click OK. Repeat Step 2. On the Certificates tab, click SSL Parameters. Under Others, select Client Authentication. Under Others, next to Client Certificate, select Optional and click OK twice.

After configuring the client certificate, test the authentication by logging on to the Access Gateway using the Access Gateway Plug-in. If you have more than one certificate installed, you receive a prompt asking you to select the correct certificate. After selecting the certificate, the logon screen appears with the user name populated with the information obtained from the certificate. Type the password and click Login.

142

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If you do not see the correct user name in the User Name field on the logon screen, check the user accounts and groups in Active Directory. The groups that are defined on the Access Gateway must be the same as those in Active Directory. In Active Directory, configure groups at the domain root level. If you create Active Directory groups that are not in the domain root level, this could cause incorrect reading of the client certificate. If users and groups are not at the domain root level, the Access Gateway logon page displays the user name that is configured in Active Directory. For example, in Active Directory, you have a folder called Users and the certificate says CN=Users. In the logon page, in User Name, the word Users appears. If you do not want to move your group and user accounts to the root domain level, when configuring the certificate authentication server on the Access Gateway, leave User Name Field and Group Name Field blank.

Disabling Authentication
If your deployment does not require authentication, you can disable it. This should be done for each virtual server that does not require authentication.
To disable Access Gateway authentication

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, select a virtual server and click Open. On the Authentication tab, under User Authentication, click to clear Enable Authentication.

Important: Disabling authentication stops the use of authentication, authorization, and accounting features that control and monitor connections to the Access Gateway. When users type a Web address to connect to the Access Gateway, the logon page does not appear.

Configuring the Number of User Sessions

The maximum number of users who are allowed to connect to the Access Gateway at a particular point in time can be configured at either the global level or on a per virtual server level. Sessions are not created on the Access Gateway if the number of users connecting to the appliance exceeds the value that is configured. If the number of users exceeds the number allowed, users receive an error message.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

143

Configuring the Global User Limit

When the user limit is configured globally, the restriction applies to all users who establish sessions to different virtual servers on the system. When the configured limit is reached, no new sessions can be established on any virtual server present on the Access Gateway. Setting the maximum number of users at the global level is done when setting the default authentication type for the Access Gateway.
To configure a global user limit

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change authentication settings. In the Global Authentication Settings dialog box, in Maximum Number of Users, type the number of users and click OK.

Configuring the User Limit Per Virtual Server

The user limit can also be applied to each virtual server on the system. When the user limit is configured per virtual server, the restriction applies only to those users who establish sessions with the particular virtual server. Users who establish sessions with other virtual servers are not affected by this limit.
To add and configure a virtual server user limit

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, select a virtual server and click Open. In Max Users, type the number of users and click OK.

Configuring Authentication for Specific Times

You can configure an authentication policy so users are allowed access to the internal network at specific times, such as during normal working hours. When users try to log on at a different time, logon is denied. To restrict when users log on to the Access Gateway, create an expression within the authentication policy and then bind it to a virtual server or globally.
To configure authentication for specific times

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, select an authentication policy.

144

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3. 4. 5.

Under Related Tasks, click Modify authentication policy. Under Expression, next to Match Any Expression, click Add. In the Add Expression dialog box, in Expression Type, select Date/Time. In Qualifier, select one of the following: TIME to configure the time users cannot log on DATE to configure the date users cannot log on DAYOFWEEK to configure the day users cannot log on

6. 7. 8.

In Operator, select the value. In Value, click the calendar next to the text box and select the day, date, or time. Click OK twice, click Close, and click OK. The Add Expression dialog box appears as follows:

Configuring a date, time or day of week expression

Configuring Authorization
Authorization specifies the network resources users have when they log on to the Access Gateway. The default setting for authorization is to deny access to all network resources. Citrix recommends using the default global setting and then creating authorization policies to define the network resources users can access. Authorization on the Access Gateway is configured using an authorization policy and expressions. When an authorization policy is created, you can bind it to users or groups configured on the appliance.

Setting Default Global Authorization

To define the resources users have access to on the internal network, you can configure default global authorization. Global authorization is configured by allowing or denying access to network resources on the internal network.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

145

To configure global authorization

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Security tab, next to Default Authorization Action, select Allow or Deny and click OK.

If you set the default authorization policy to deny, you must to explicitly authorize access to any network resource, which improves security. Any global authorization action you create is applied to all users who do not already have an authorization policy associated with them, either directly or through a group. A user or group authorization policy always overrides the global authorization action. If the default authorization action is set to deny, you must apply authorization policies for all users or groups before network resources are accessible to those users or groups.

Configuring Authorization Policies

When configuring an authorization policy, you can set it to allow or deny access to network resources in the internal network. For example, you want to allow users access to the [Link] network as shown in the following illustration:

Configuring an authorization policy

146

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Authorization policies are applied to users and groups. After a user is authenticated, the Access Gateway performs a group authorization check by obtaining the users group information from either an LDAP server, a RADIUS server, or a TACACS+ server. If group information is available for the user, the Access Gateway checks the network resources allowed for the group. To control which resources clients have access to, you must create authorization policies. If you do not need to create authorization policies, you can configure default global authorization.
To configure an authorization policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authorization Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authorization policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Action, select Allow or Deny. Next to Match Any Expression, click Add. Configure the expression, click OK twice, and click Close.

When the authorization policy is configured, bind it to a user or group. You can bind the policy using either the Access Gateway Policy Manager or the configuration utility.
To bind an authorization policy to a user or group using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1.

Under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Groups or Users and then expand the node for the user or group to which you want to add the authorization policy. Under Available Policies / Resources, select the authorization policy and drag it to Authorization Policies for the user or group.

2.

To bind an authorization policy to a user using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, select Access Gateway > Users. In the details pane, select a user and click Open. On the Authorization tab, under Active, select the authorization policy and click OK.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

147

To bind an authorization policy to a group using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, select Access Gateway > Groups. In the details pane, select a group and click Open. On the Authorization tab, under Active, select the authorization policy and click OK.

Setting the Priority for Authorization Policies

Authorization policies are applied first to users and then to groups. When a user logs on, the Access Gateway checks to see if an authorization policy is bound to the user. If an authorization policy is not bound to the user, the Access Gateway check for group authorization policies. If none are found at the group level, the default global authorization is applied. You can set the priority of an authorization policy. For example, you configured an authorization policy for a group and for a user. You set the priority so that the Access Gateway checks the group policy before checking the user policy. A numeric value is assigned to the priority. For example, you can set the group priority to zero and the user priority to one for the Access Gateway to check the group authorization policy first.
To set the priority for authorization policies

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, do one of the following: Select Access Gateway > Groups. - or Select Access Gateway > Users.

2. 3.

In the details pane, select a user or group and click Open. On the Authorization tab, next to the policy, under Priority, select the priority number and click OK.

Configuring LDAP Group Extraction

The following is a discussion of LDAP group membership attributes that will and will not work with Access Gateway authorization. If you are using double-source authentication, groups extracted from both the primary and secondary authentication sources are concatenated. Authorization policies can be applied to the group that is extracted from the primary or secondary authentication server.

148

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The group names obtained from the LDAP server are compared with the group names created locally on the Access Gateway. If the two group names match, the properties of the local group apply to the group obtained from the LDAP servers. If users belong to more than one LDAP group, the Access Gateway extracts user information from all the groups to which users belong.

Group Memberships from Group Objects Working Evaluations

This type of group memberships on LDAP servers that evaluate group memberships from group objects indirectly work with Access Gateway authorization. Some LDAP servers enable user objects to contain information about groups to which they belong, such as Active Directory or eDirectory. A users group membership can be computable attributes from the user object, such as IBM Directory Server or Sun ONE directory server. In some LDAP servers, this attribute can be used to include a users dynamic group membership, nesting group membership, and static group membership to locate all group memberships from a single attribute. For example, in IBM Directory Server, all group memberships, including the static, dynamic, and nested groups, can be returned using the ibm-allGroups attribute. In Sun ONE, all roles, including managed, filtered, and nested, are calculated using the nsRole attribute.

Group Memberships from Group Objects NonWorking Evaluations

This type of group memberships on LDAP servers that evaluate group memberships from group objects indirectly will not work with Access Gateway authorization. Some LDAP servers enable only group objects such as the Lotus Domino LDAP server to contain information about users. The LDAP server does not enable the user object to contain information about groups. For this type of LDAP server, group membership searches are performed by locating the user on the member list of groups.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

149

LDAP Group Attribute Fields

The following table contains examples of LDAP group attribute fields.
Microsoft Active Directory Server Novell eDirectory IBM Directory Server Sun ONE directory (formerly iPlanet) memberOf groupMembership ibm-allGroups nsRole

LDAP authorization is configured in the authentication policy by setting the group attribute name and the subattribute.
To configure LDAP authorization

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select LDAP. Next to Server, click New. Under Server, type the IP address and port of the LDAP server. In Group Attribute, type memberOf. In Sub attribute Name, type CN and click Create. In the Create authentication policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

Configuring LDAP Nested Group Extraction

The Access Gateway can query LDAP groups and extract group and user information from ancestor groups configured on the authentication server. For example, you created group1 and within that group, created group2 and group3. If the user belongs to group3, the Access Gateway extracts information from all the ancestor groups (group2, group1) up to the specified level. You can configure LDAP nested group extraction using an authentication policy. When the query is run, the Access Gateway searches the groups until the maximum nesting level is reached or until there are no further groups to search.

150

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To configure nested group extraction

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select LDAP. Next to Server, click New. Configure the settings for the LDAP server. Click Nested Group Extraction. In Maximum Nesting Level, type the number of levels the Access Gateway checks. In Group Name Identifier, type the LDAP attribute name that uniquely identifies a group name on the LDAP server, such as sAMAccountName. In Group Search Attribute, type the LDAP attribute name that is to be obtained in the search response to determine the parent groups of any group, such as memberOf. In Group Search Sub-Attribute, type the LDAP subattribute name that is to be searched for as part of the Group Search Attribute to determine the parent groups of any group. For example, type CN. In Search Filter, type the query string. For example, the filter could be (&(samaccountname=test)(objectClass=*)). Click Create. In the Create authentication policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

11.

12. 13. 14.

Configuring RADIUS Group Extraction

You can configure RADIUS authorization using a method called group extraction. This allows you to administer users on your RADIUS server instead of adding them to the Access Gateway. RADIUS authorization is configured using an authentication policy and configuring the group vendor identifier (ID), the group attribute type, the group prefix, and a group separator. When the policy is configured, add an expression, and then bind the policy either globally or to a virtual server.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

151

If you are using Microsofts Internet Authentication Service (IAS) for RADIUS authorization, during configuration of the Access Gateway, the following information needs to be provided: Vendor Identifier is the vendor-specific code number that was entered in IAS. Attribute type is the vendor-assigned attribute number. Attribute name is the type of attribute name that is defined in IAS. The default name is CTXSUserGroups=.

If IAS is not installed on the RADIUS server, you can install it from Add/Remove Programs in Control Panel. For more information, see the Windows online Help. To configure IAS, use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) and install the snap-in for IAS. Follow the wizard, making sure you select the following settings: Select local computer. Select Remote Access Policies and create a custom policy. Select Windows-Groups for the policy. Select one of the following protocols: Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MS-CHAP v2) Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MSCHAP) Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) Unencrypted authentication (PAP, SPAP)

Select the Vendor-Specific Attribute. The Access Gateway needs the Vendor-Specific Attribute to match the users defined in the group on the server with those on the Access Gateway. This is done by sending the Vendor-Specific Attributes to the Access Gateway. Make sure you type RADIUS=Standard.

The RADIUS default is 0. Use this number for the vendor code. The vendor-assigned attribute number is 0. This is the assigned number for the User Group attribute. The attribute is in string format.

152

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Select String for the Attribute format. The Attribute value requires the attribute name and the groups. For the Access Gateway, the attribute value is CTXSUserGroups=groupname. If two groups are defined, such as sales and finance, the attribute value is CTXSUserGroups=sales;finance. Separate each group with a semicolon.

Remove all other entries in the Edit Dial-in Profile dialog box, leaving the one that says Vendor-Specific.

When you are finished configuring the Remote Access Policy in IAS, go to the Access Gateway and configure RADIUS authorization. When configuring RADIUS authentication, use the settings that are configured on the IAS server.
To configure RADIUS authorization

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Authentication Type, select RADIUS. Next to Server, click New. In Name, type the name of the RADIUS server. Under Server, type the IP address and port of the RADIUS server. Under Details, enter the values for Group Vendor Code and Group Attribute Type. In Password Encoding, select the authentication protocol and click Create. In the Create Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, click General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

Configuring LDAP Group Extraction for Multiple Domains

If you have multiple domains for authentication and are using the Web Interface, you can configure the Access Gateway to use group extraction to send the correct domain name to the Web Interface.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

153

In Active Directory, you need to create a group for each domain in your network. After the group is created, add users that belong to the group and specified domain. After the groups are configured in Active Directory, configure the Access Gateway. To configure the Access Gateway for group extraction for multiple domains, you need to create the same number of session and authentication polices as there are domains. For example, you have two domains, named Sampa and Child. Each domain receives one session policy and one authentication policy. After creating the policies, you create groups on the Access Gateway, binding the session policies to the group. Then, bind the authentication policies to a virtual server.

Creating Session Policies for Group Extraction

The first step is to create two session profiles and set the following parameters: Enable ICA proxy Add the Web Interface Web address Add the Windows domain Add the profile to a session policy and set the expression to true

To create the session profiles for group extraction

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. In the details pane, click the Profiles tab and click Add. In Name, type a name for the profile, such as Sampa. On the Published Applications tab, do the following: A. B. C. Next to ICA Proxy, click Override Global and select ON. Next to Web Interface Address, click Override Global and type the URL of the Web Interface. Next to Single Sign-On Domain, click Override Global, type the name of the domain, and click Create.

5. 6.

In Name, clear the name of the first domain and type the name of the second domain, such as Child. Next to Single Sign-On Domain, clear the name of the first domain and type the name of the second domain, click Create, and click Close.

When the session profiles are created, create two session policies. Each session policy use one of the profiles.

154

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To create a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. In the details pane, on the Policies tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Request Profile, select the profile for the first domain. Next to Named Expressions, click General, select True value, click Add Expression, and click Create. In Name, change the name to the second domain. In Request Profile, select the profile for the second domain, click Create, and click Close.

Creating LDAP Authentication Policies

After the session policies are created, create LDAP authentication policies that are almost identical. When configuring the authentication policy, the important field is the Search Filter. You must type the name of the group you created in Active Directory.
To create authentication profiles for multiple domain group extraction

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Authentication. In the details pane, click the Servers tab and click Add. In Name, type the name of the first domain, such as Sampa. Next to Authentication Type, select LDAP and click Create.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

155

Authentication profile for the first domain. In this example, the domain name is Sampa. 5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to configure the authentication profile of the second domain. Click Close.

156

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Authentication profile for the second domain. In this example, the domain name is Child. When the profiles are created and saved, create the authentication policies.
To create authentication policies for multiple domain group extraction

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the details pane, click the Policies tab and click Add. In Name, type the name of the first domain. In Authentication Type, select LDAP. In Server, select the authentication profile for the first domain. Next to Named Expressions, click General, select True value, click Add Expression, and click Create. In Name, type the name of the second domain. In Server, select the authentication profile for the second domain, click Create, and click Close.

Creating Groups and Binding Policies

After creating the authentication policies, create groups on the Access Gateway.

Chapter 8

Configuring Authentication and Authorization

157

Important: When creating groups on the Access Gateway for group extraction from multiple domains, group names must be the same as those defined in Active Directory. Group names are also case-sensitive and must match those in Active Directory.

To create groups on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Groups. In the details pane, click Add. In Group Name, type the name of the first Active Directory group. On the Policies tab, select the session policy for the group and click Create. In Group Name, type the name of the second Active Directory group. On the Policies tab, select the session policy for the group and click Create.

After creating the groups, bind the authentication policy to a virtual server.
To bind the authentication policies to a virtual server

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, select a virtual server and click Open. On the Authentication tab, select the two authentication policies. On the Policies tab, click to clear any policies that are selected and click OK.

158

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

C HAPTER 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

Users can connect to your organizations network resources using several different methods. These include: Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps that establish an ICA session to a server farm Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows that is software installed on the client device Access Gateway Plug-in for Java that is software that allows connections using a Macintosh, Linux, UNIX, or Windows computer Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX that allows connections from a computer running Windows XP and Internet Explorer Clientless access that provides users with the access they need without installing client software Interoperability with Citrix Repeater Plug-in

SmartAccess determines automatically the methods of access that are allowed for a client device based on the results of an endpoint analysis scan. For more information about SmartAccess, see How SmartAccess Works on page 190. In This Chapter Choosing the Client Access Method Configuring Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps Configuring the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows How the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX Works Selecting the Plug-in Type Connecting Using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java How Clientless Access Works

160

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring the Client Choices Page Configuring Access Scenario Fallback Using the Repeater Plug-in

Choosing the Client Access Method

You can configure the Access Gateway to provide user connections using a variety of scenarios. These include: User connections using the Access Gateway Plug-in. User connections using the Web Interface. User connections using clientless access. User connections if a preauthentication or post-authentication scan fails. This is called access scenario fallback.

The Access Gateway Plug-in is software that is downloaded and installed on a client device. When users log on using the plug-in, users can access resources in the secure network as if they were in the office. Resources include email servers, file shares, and intranet Web sites. Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps is software that uses the ICA network protocol to establish user connections. The XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps work with the Web Interface to provide users with access to published applications in a server farm. Clientless access provides users with the access they need without installing client software, such as the Access Gateway Plug-in or XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps. Clientless access allows connections to Web resources such as Outlook Web Access or SharePoint, applications published on Citrix XenApp, desktops published on Citrix XenDesktop, and file shares in the secure network using the Access Interface. Access scenario fallback allows a client device to fall back from the Access Gateway Plug-in to the Web Interface (using XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps) if the client device does not pass the initial endpoint analysis check.

Configuring Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps

Citrix XenApp lets users run applications published on servers by enabling connections from various computer platforms through Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps software.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

161

How Users Connect to a Server Farm

Clients gain access to published applications in the server farm by establishing a connection to the Access Gateway using the ICA protocol. Note: If you are deploying the Access Gateway in a double-hop DMZ, the Access Gateway Plug-in (for Windows, Java, or ActiveX) cannot be used. For more information, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop. Citrix recommends connections to the internal network in two ways: XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps connection. In this scenario, the user opens a Web browser and types the FQDN of the Access Gateway. On the logon page, the user logs on and is authenticated. After authentication, the user session is redirected to the Web Interface, which is running behind the Access Gateway. When users click a published application, it uses the Secure Ticket Authority (STA) information configured on the Web Interface and when the ticket is returned to the client, the ICA connection is established using XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps. In this scenario, the Access Gateway Plug-in is not used. To establish a connection through the Access Gateway, the ticket is presented to the Access Gateway by the client software and then the Access Gateway validates the ticket using its list of servers. Note: If an ICA connection is made using Citrix Presentation Server Clients for Windows Version 10.1 or higher or XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps, client certificate authentication is supported. If users are connecting using earlier versions of the client software, client certificate authentication is not supported.

Citrix Presentation Server Clients connecting to a server farm

162

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Direct connections using XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps or Access Gateway Plug-in. This scenario allows users to connect to the internal network using two separate connections at the same time. The first connection is using the XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps to establish the connection using the steps listed in the scenario above. If users need to access other resources on the internal network, they can also log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in. For example, users want to connect to a Microsoft Exchange server in the network; they start Microsoft Outlook on their computer. The secure connection is made using the Access Gateway Plug-in, which connects to the Access Gateway. The SSL VPN tunnel is created to the Exchange server and users can access their email.

Access Gateway Plug-in and XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps simultaneously connected When the Web Interface is configured for authentication or to access resources in the server farm, it could be deployed in the secure network. Important: Citrix recommends configuring authentication on the Access Gateway if the Web Interface is running behind the Access Gateway or is in the secure network. When the Web Interface is in the secure network, authentication must be enabled on the virtual server. When authentication is disabled, unauthenticated HTTP requests are sent directly to the server running the Web Interface. Disabling authentication is recommended only when the Web Interface is in the DMZ and users are connecting directly to the Web Interface. For more information about deploying the Web Interface with the Access Gateway, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

163

Configuring the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows

You can configure the Access Gateway Plug-in either globally or using a session policy on the Access Gateway. If you create a session policy, you can bind it to a user, group, virtual server, or globally.
To configure the Access Gateway Plug-in using global settings

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, next to Windows Plugin Type, select Access Gateway. Next to Plugin Type, select Windows and click OK.

To configure a session policy, see To configure a session policy for client connections on page 171.

Installing the Access Gateway Plug-in

When users log on to the Access Gateway, the Access Gateway Plug-in is downloaded and installed on the client device. To install the plug-in, users must be a local administrator or a member of the Administrators group to install programs on their device. This restriction applies for first-time installation only, not for upgrades. To enable users to connect to and use the Access Gateway, you need to provide them with the following information: Access Gateway Web address, such as [Link] Path to any network drives that the users can access, which is done by mapping a network drive on the client device Any system requirements for running the Access Gateway Plug-in if you configured endpoint resources and policies

Depending on the configuration of a remote users system, you might also need to provide additional information: If a user runs a firewall on their computer, the user might need to change the firewall settings so that it does not block traffic to or from the IP addresses corresponding to the resources for which you granted access. The Access Gateway Plug-in automatically handles Internet Connection Firewall in Windows XP and Windows Firewall in Windows XP Service Pack 2. For information about configuring a variety of popular firewalls, see Configuring Third-Party Personal Firewalls on page 231.

164

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Users who want to send traffic to FTP over the Access Gateway connection must set their FTP application to perform passive transfers. A passive transfer means that the remote computer establishes the data connection to your FTP server, rather than your FTP server establishing the data connection to the remote computer. Users who want to run X client applications across the connection must run an X server, such as XManager, on their computers.

Because users work with files and applications just as if they were local to the organizations network, no retraining of users or configuration of applications is needed. To establish a secure connection for the first time, log on to the Access Gateway using the Web logon page. The typical format of a Web address is [Link] When users log on, they can install the Access Gateway Plug-in on their computer.
To install the Access Gateway Plug-in

1. 2.

In a Web browser, type the Web address of the Access Gateway. Type the user name and password and click Logon.

When the download is complete, the Access Gateway Plug-in connects and displays a message in the notification area. If you want users to connect using the Access Gateway Plug-in without using a Web browser, you can configure the plug-in to display the logon dialog box when you click the icon on your desktop. Users can also right-click the Access Gateway icon in the notification area on a Windows computer.
To configure logon using the Access Gateway Plug-in

1. 2. 3.

In the notification area, right-click the Access Gateway icon and click Configure Access Gateway. Click the Profile tab and then click Change Profile. On the Options tab, click Use the Access Gateway Plugin for logon.

Users can log on by double-clicking the Access Gateway icon on the desktop or by right-clicking the Access Gateway icon in the notification area.

Deploying the Access Gateway Plug-in from Active Directory

If users do not have administrative privileges to install the Access Gateway Plugin on the client device, you can deploy the client from Active Directory.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

165

When you deploy the Access Gateway Plug-in using this method, you can extract the installation program and then deploy it using a group policy. The general steps for this type of deployment are: Extracting the MSI package Distributing the plug-in using a group policy Creating a distribution point Assigning the Access Gateway Plug-in package using a Group Policy Object Note: Distribution of the Access Gateway Plug-in from Active Directory is supported on Windows XP and Windows Vista only. You can download the MSI package from the configuration utility or from My Citrix.
To download the Access Gateway Plug-in MSI package from the configuration utility

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, click Downloads. Under Citrix Access Gateway Plugin, click Download Access Gateway Plugin for Windows and save the file nsvpnc_setup.exe to your Windows server. Note: If the File Download dialog box does not appear, press the CTRL key when you click the link Download Access Gateway Plugin for Windows.

3.

At a command prompt navigate to the folder that you saved nsvpnc_setup.exe to and type:
nsvpnc_setup /c

This extracts the file [Link]. 4. Save the extracted file to a folder on the Windows server.

After the file is extracted, you want to distribute the file using a group policy on Windows Server 2003. Before starting the distribution, install the Group Policy Management Console on Windows Server 2003. For more information, see the Windows online help.

166

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Note: When you are publishing the Access Gateway Plug-in using a group policy, Citrix recommends assigning the package to the client device. The MSI package is designed to be installed on a per-device basis. Before you can distribute the software, create a distribution point on a network share on a publishing server, such as Microsoft Internet Security and Acceleration (ISA) Server.
To create a distribution point

1. 2. 3.

Log on to the publishing server as an administrator. Create a folder and share it on the network with read permission for all accounts that need access to the distribution package. At a command prompt, navigate to the folder where the extracted file is and type:
msiexec -a [Link]

4.

On the Network Location screen, click Change and navigate to the shared folder where you want to create the administrative installation of the Access Gateway Plug-in. Click OK and click Install.

After you have put the extracted package on the network share, assign the package to a Group Policy Object in Windows. When the Access Gateway Plug-in is successfully configured as a managed software package, it is installed automatically the next time the client device starts. Note: When the installation package is assigned to a computer, restarting the computer is required. When the installation starts, users receive a message that the Access Gateway Plug-in is installing.

Upgrading the Access Gateway Plug-in for Active Directory

Each release of the Access Gateway Plug-in is packaged as a full product installation, instead of as a patch. When a new version of the Access Gateway is detected, the Access Gateway Plug-in upgrades automatically. The automatic upgrade occurs only when users log on to the Access Gateway. You can deploy the Access Gateway Plug-in to upgrade using Active Directory.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

167

To do so, create a new distribution point of the Access Gateway Plug-in. Create a new Group Policy Object and assign the new version of the plug-in to it. Then create a link between the new package and the existing package. When this link is created, the Access Gateway Plug-in is updated.

Removing the Access Gateway Plug-in from Client Devices

To remove the Access Gateway Plug-in from client devices, remove the assigned package from the Group Policy Object Editor. When the plug-in is removed from the client device, users receive a message that the client is uninstalling.

Troubleshooting the Access Gateway Plug-in Installation Using Active Directory

If the assigned package fails to install when the client device starts, you might see the following warning in the application event log:
Failed to apply changes to software installation settings. Software installation policy application has been delayed until the next logon because an administrator has enabled logon optimization for group policy. The error was: The group policy framework should call the extension in the synchronous foreground policy refresh.

This error is caused by Fast Logon Optimization in Windows XP where users are allowed to log on before the operating system initialized all of the networking components, including Group Policy Object processing. Some policies might require more than one restart to take effect. To resolve this issue, disable Fast Logon Optimization in Active Directory. To troubleshoot other installation issues for managed software, Citrix recommends enabling Windows Installer Logging using a group policy.

Monitoring and Ending User Sessions

You can monitor user sessions using the configuration utility. You can determine the client IP address and port, the virtual server users are logged on to and the destination port. You can end user sessions using the configuration utility. When you end a session, the user cannot connect to resources in the secure network.
To end a user session

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Monitor Connections, click Active user sessions.

168

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

3.

Under To end session(s), select a user or group from the list and click on the [Terminate] button, select a user and click Terminate.

You can also terminate user sessions using the Intranet IP address and subnet mask.
To terminate user session based on IP addresses

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Monitor Connections, click Active user sessions. Under To end session(s), enter Intranet IP and/or netmask and click on [Terminate] button in Intranet IP type the IP address, in Netmask, type the subnet mask and click Terminate.

Configuring Access to Published Applications Using the Access Gateway Plug-in

You can provide users access to other types of applications. For example, you can configure the Access Gateway so that all users connect using the Access Gateway Plug-in and use the Web Interface as the home page. This scenario supports single sign-on to the Web Interface. In addition to access to published applications, users can also run applications installed on the client device that make network connections through the VPN tunnel. You can change the configuration from using XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps only to using the Access Gateway Plug-in with single sign-on to the Web Interface. To start the configuration, use the following guidelines: Create a Web Interface site Configure Advanced Access Control settings Configure SmartAccess Configure endpoint analysis on the Access Gateway Configure policies and filters on Citrix XenApp Configure the Access Gateway so users log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in

For more information about configuring SmartAccess, see How SmartAccess Works on page 190.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

169

When configuring user logon to Citrix XenApp, you first create a session profile to select the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows. Then you create a profile for intranet applications for access to Citrix XenApp and the Web Interface.
To configure global settings for the Access Gateway Plug-in for access to published applications

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Published Applications tab, in Web Interface Address, type the URL of the Web Interface site. This becomes the home page for users. Next to ICA Proxy, select OFF. In Single Sign-On Domain, type the Active Directory domain name. On the Client Experience tab, next to Windows Plugin Type, select Access Gateway. Next to Plugin Type, select Windows and click OK.

To configure the intranet application

1.

In the configuration utility, in the details pane, under Intranet applications, click Create the necessary mappings to the TCP Applications behind the Access Gateway for clients using the Java Plug-in. In the Bind Intranet Applications dialog box, click New. In Name, type a name for the application. Under Options, next to Interception Mode, select Transparent. Under Destination, click Specify an IP Address and Netmask and type the IP address and subnet mask that represents your internal network and click Create. For example, type [Link] and the subnet mask [Link] to represent all servers on the 172.16.100.x subnet. The IP address of the Web Interface, XenApp, and all other servers to which users connect must be in one of the subnets defined as an intranet application.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

After clicking Create, in the Bind Intranet Applications dialog box, confirm that the intranet application is listed in the Configured Intranet Applications column and click OK.

When users log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in, the VPN tunnel is established and the Web Interface is used as the home page.

170

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

How the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX Works

The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX has the same features and functionality as the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows. The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX is installed in Internet Explorer instead of on the client device desktop or notification area. The plug-in is not installed on the client device desktop or on the Start menu. Note: Citrix recommends adding the Access Gateway Web address for your organization to the Trusted Sites list in Internet Explorer. The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX can be installed on the following operating systems: Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP (all versions) Windows Server 2003

The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX requires Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. Users cannot connect using this version of the plug-in if they are connecting from Windows Vista.

Using the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX

The Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX installs using the same method as the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows. Users type the Web address of the Access Gateway in the Web browser. Users type their credentials on the logon page to connect. When users connect, they are prompted to install the ActiveX control on the client device, as shown in the following illustration:

Prompt to install the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

171

When the ActiveX control is installed, the user is connected to the Access Gateway. The Access Interface appears with the menu in the above illustration appearing in the lower right corner. When the user logs off, the menu and Access Interface close.
To configure global settings for the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, next to Windows Plugin Type, select ActiveX. Next to Plugin Type, select Windows and click OK.

Selecting the Plug-in Type

When you are configuring the Access Gateway, you can choose how clients log on: using Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows, Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX or Access Gateway Plug-in for Java. Configuration is completed using a session policy and then bound to users, groups, virtual servers, or globally.
To configure a session policy for client connections

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Session Policies. Do one of the following: If you are creating a new session policy, under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy If you are changing an existing policy, select a policy and under Related Tasks, click Modify session policy

3.

Create a new profile or modify an existing profile. To do so, do one of the following: Next to Request Profile, click New Next to Request Profile, click Modify

4.

On the Client Experience tab, next to Windows Plugin Type, click Override Global and do one of the following: Select Access Gateway to use the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows

172

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

5. 6.

Select ActiveX to use the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX

If you select Access Gateway, in Plugin Type, click Override Global and select Windows. Do one of the following: If you are creating a new profile, click Create, set the expression in the policy dialog box, click Create, and click Close If you are modifying an existing profile, after making the selection, click OK twice

If you are configuring the Access Gateway Plug-in, you also need to configure the interception mode and set it to transparent.
To set the interception mode for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Intranet Applications. Under Related Tasks, click Create new intranet application. Under Options, in Interception Mode, select Transparent. In Protocol, select ANY. Under Destination, click Specify an IP Address and in IP address type the IP address. In Netmask, type the subnet mask, click Create, and click Close.

Connecting Using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java

The Access Gateway Plug-in for Java can be used on any client device that supports Java. The system requirements are: Mac OS X with Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.4.2 with Safari 1.2 (v125) browser Linux distributions that have JRE 1.4.2 and above with Mozilla 1.2.1+ or Netscape 7.1 browsers Windows 2000 (all versions), Windows XP (all versions), or Windows Server 2003 JRE 1.4.2 is required when using the following Web browsers: Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

173

The Access Gateway Plug-in for Java supports most TCP-based applications, but provides only some of the features of the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows or Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX. Users do not require administrative privileges on the client device to use the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java. For security reasons, you might want to require using this plug-in version for a particular virtual server, group, or user, regardless of which client device is used. To configure the Access Gateway to install the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java on client devices, configure a session policy and then bind it to the virtual server, group, or user.
To configure the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Session Policies. Select a policy and then click Modify session policy. Next to Request Profile, click Modify. On the Client Experience tab, in Windows Plugin Type, click Override Global and select Access Gateway. Next to Plugin Type, click Override Global, select Java, and click OK twice.

After creating the session policy, create an intranet application to define the interception mode for users logging on using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java.
To set the interception mode

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Intranet Applications. Under Related Tasks, click Create new intranet application. In Name, type a name. Under Options, in Interception Mode, select PROXY. Under Destination, in IP Address, type the IP address. In Port, type the port number, click Create, and click Close.

If you do not specify a source IP address and port number, the Access Gateway automatically uses [Link] for the IP address and 0 for the port.

174

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

How Clientless Access Works

Clientless access allows users the access they need without installing client software, such as the Access Gateway Plug-in. Users can use their Web browser to connect to Web applications such as Outlook Web Access Clientless access is configured using the following steps: Enabling clientless access either globally or using a session policy bound to a user, group, or virtual server Selecting the Web address encoding method

To enable clientless access for only a specific virtual server, disable clientless access globally and then enable it using a session policy. If you use the Access Gateway wizard to configure the appliance, you have the choice of configuring clientless access within the wizard. The settings in the wizard are applied globally. Within the Access Gateway wizard, you can configure the following client connection methods: Access Gateway Plug-in. Users are allowed to log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in only. Use the Access Gateway Plug-in and allow access scenario fallback. Users log on to the Access Gateway using the Access Gateway Plug-in. If the client device fails an endpoint analysis scan, users are permitted to log on using clientless access. When this occurs, users have limited access to network resources. Allow users to log on using a Web browser and clientless access. Users can log on only using clientless access and they receive limited access to network resources.

Enabling Clientless Access

When clientless access is enabled on a global level, all users receive the settings for clientless access. You can enable clientless access using the Access Gateway wizard, using a global policy, or a session policy. In a session profile, clientless access has the following settings: On. Enables clientless access. If client choices are disabled and the Web Interface is not configured or disabled, users log on using clientless access. Allow. Clientless access is not enabled by default. If client choices are disabled, and the Web Interface is not configured or disabled, users log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in. If endpoint analysis fails when users log on, users receive the choices page with clientless access available.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

175

Off. Clientless access is turned off. When this setting is selected, users cannot log on using clientless access and the icon for clientless access does not appear on the choices page.

If you did not enable clientless access using the Access Gateway wizard, you can enable it globally using the configuration utility.
To enable clientless access globally

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, next to Clientless Access, select ON and click OK.

If you want only a select group of users, groups, or virtual servers to use clientless access, disable or turn off clientless access globally. Then, using a session policy, enable clientless access and bind it to users, groups, or virtual servers.
To enable clientless access using a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Client Experience tab, next to Clientless Access, click Override Global, select On, and click OK. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create and click Close.

After creating the session policy that enables clientless access, bind it to a user, group, or virtual server.

Encoding the Web Address

When clientless access is enabled, you can choose to encode the addresses of internal Web applications or to leave the address as clear text. The settings are: Obscure. This uses standard encoding mechanisms to make the domain and protocol part of the resource unclear to users. Clear. The Web address is not encoded and is visible to users.

176

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Encrypt. The domain and protocol are encrypted using a session key. When the Web address is encrypted, the URL is different for each user session for the same Web resource. If users bookmark the encoded Web address, save it in the Web browser and then log off, when users log on and try to connect to the Web address again using the bookmark, they cannot connect to the Web address. If users save the encrypted bookmark in the Access Interface during their session, the bookmark works each time the user logs on.

You can configure this setting either globally or as part of a session policy. If you configure encoding as part of session policy, you can bind it to the users, groups, or a virtual server.
To configure Web address encoding globally

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, next to Clientless Access URL Encoding, select the encoding level and click OK.

To configure Web address encoding using a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Client Experience tab, next to Clientless Access URL Encoding, click Override Global, select the encoding level, and click OK. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

How Clientless Access Policies Work

Clientless access to Web applications is configured using policies. You can configure the settings for a clientless access policy in the Access Gateway Policy Manager or from the configuration utility. A clientless access policy is composed of a rule and a profile.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

177

Three default clientless access policies are included with the Access Gateway. The first policy is a preconfigured policy for Outlook Web Access. The second is the default policy for all other Web applications. The third is a policy for SharePoint 2007. These policies are configured automatically and cannot be changed. In addition, each policy is bound at the global level and is not enforced unless clientless access is enabled either globally or using a session policy. The global bindings for the default clientless access policies cannot be removed or modified, even if clientless access is not enabled. The default policies are bound only at the global level. If you want to bind clientless access policies to a virtual server, create a new policy and then bind it. Custom clientless access policies can be bound either globally or to a virtual server. To enforce different policies for clientless access at either the virtual server or global levels, change the priority number of the custom policy so it has a lower number than the default policies. If no other clientless access policies are bound to the virtual server, the default global policies take precedence. Note: The priority numbers of the default clientless access policies cannot be changed.

Creating New Clientless Access Policies

If you want to use the same settings as the default clientless access policies but bind the policy to a virtual server, you can copy the default policies, providing a new name for the policy. Citrix recommends copying the default policies using the Access Gateway Policy Manager. When the new policy is bound to the virtual server, you can set the priority of the policy so that it executes first when a user logs on.
To create a new clientless access policy using default settings

1. 2. 3.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Clientless Access and click a default policy. Under Related Tasks, click Create new clientless access policy. In Name, type a new name for the policy, click Create, and click Close.

When the new policy is created, bind it to the virtual server.

To bind a clientless access policy to a virtual server

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click Virtual Servers and expand the node for a virtual server.

178

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2.

Under Available Policies / Resources, expand Clientless Access, click the new policy, and drag it to Clientless Access Policies in the virtual server node. In the Modify Priority dialog box, in Priority, type a priority number and click OK.

3.

Configuring Domain Access for Users

If users are connecting using clientless access, you can restrict the network resources, domains, and Web sites users are permitted to access. You can create lists for including or excluding domains using the Access Gateway wizard or global settings. You can allow access to all network resources, domain, and Web sites and then create an exclusion list. The exclusion list is a specific set of resources that users are not allowed to access. Any domains that are in the list are not accessible by users. You can also deny access to everything and then create a specific inclusion list where users only have access to the resources that are defined in the inclusion list. Any domains that are not in the list are not accessible by users.
To configure domain access using the Access Gateway wizard

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Getting Started, click Access Gateway wizard. Click Next and follow the directions in the wizard until you reach the Configure clientless access page. Click Configure Domains for Clientless Access and do one of the following: To create a list of excluded domains, click Exclude domains To create a list of included domains, click Allow domains

5. 6. 7.

Under Domain Names, type the domain name and click Add. Repeat Step 5 for each domain you want to add to the list and click OK when finished. Continue configuring the appliance using the Access Gateway wizard.

You can also create or modify the domain list using global settings in the configuration utility.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

179

To configure domain settings using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Clientless Access, click Configure Domains for Clientless Access. Click Configure Domains for Clientless Access and do one of the following: To create a list of excluded domains, click Exclude domains To create a list of included domains, click Allow domains

4. 5.

Under Domain Names, type the domain name and click Add. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each domain you want to add to the list and click OK when finished.

Configuring Clientless Access for SharePoint 2003 and SharePoint 2007

The Access Gateway can rewrite content from a SharePoint site so that it is available to users without requiring the Access Gateway Plug-in. For the rewrite process to complete successfully, the Access Gateway must be configured with the host name for each SharePoint server in your network. You can configure the host name for SharePoint sites using the Access Gateway wizard or from the configuration utility. In the Access Gateway wizard, navigate through the wizard to configure your settings. When you come to the Configure clientless access page, type the Web address for the SharePoint site and click Add. To add additional Web sites or to configure SharePoint for the first time after running the Access Gateway wizard, you use the configuration utility.
To configure SharePoint Web sites in the configuration utility

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Clientless Access, click Configure Clientless Access for SharePoint. Under Clientless Access for SharePoint, in Host name of SharePoint server, type the host name for the SharePoint site and click Add. Repeat Step 3 for each SharePoint site you want to add to the list and click OK when finished.

180

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If you want users to have the SharePoint site as their home page, configure a session profile and enter the host name of the SharePoint site.
To configure a SharePoint site as the home page

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Client Experience tab, next to Home Page click Override Global, and they type the name of the SharePoint site. Next to Clientless Access, click Override Global, and select ON. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, click General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

After completing the session policy, bind it to users, groups, virtual servers, or globally. When users log on, they see the Sharepoint Web site as their home page.

Enabling Name Resolution for SharePoint 2007 Servers

SharePoint servers send the configured server name as the host name within various URLs as part of the response. If a configured SharePoint server name is not the fully qualified domain name (FQDN), the Access Gateway is not able to resolve the IP address using the SharePoint server name and some user functions time-out with the error message HTTP:1.1 Gateway Time-out. These functions can include checking files in and out, viewing the workspace, and uploading multiple files when users are logged on using clientless access. To resolve this issue, you can try one of the following: Configure a DNS suffix on the Access Gateway so that the SharePoint host name is converted to an FQDN before name resolution Configure a local DNS entry on the Access Gateway for every SharePoint server name Change all the SharePoint server names to use the FQDN, such as [Link] instead of just SharePoint

Chapter 9 To configure a DNS suffix

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

181

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand DNS and click DNS Suffix. In the details pane, click Add. In DNS Suffix, type the intranet domain name as the suffix, click Create and click Close.

To configure a local DNS record for every SharePoint server name on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand DNS > Records and click Address Records. In the details pane, click Add. In Host Name, type the SharePoint host name for the DNS address record. In IP Address, type the IP address of the SharePoint server, click Add, click Create and click Close.

The host name for which an A record is added should not have a CNAME record. Also, there cannot be duplicate A records on the appliance.

Configuring the Client Choices Page

You can configure the Access Gateway to provide users with multiple logon options. With client choices, users have the option of logging on using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows, Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX, Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, the Web Interface, or clientless access from one location. Users log on to the Access Gateway using the Web address of the Access Gateway or virtual server. Using a session policy and profile, you can determine the logon choices users receive. Depending on how the Access Gateway is configured, users are presented with up to three icons for logon choices. The most common are the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows, Web Interface, and clientless access. If users select the Access Gateway Plug-in to log on, a Web page appears and installation of the plug-in starts. After the plug-in is installed, users can log on using the icon located in the notification area or on the desktop. If users select the Web Interface to log on, the Web Interface page appears. Users can then access their published applications. If users select clientless access to log on, the Access Interface or your customized home page appears. On the Access Interface, users can navigate to file shares, Web sites, and use Outlook Web Access.

182

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If users select the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX to log on, a dialog box that prompts download of the ActiveX control appears. When it is installed, users are connected to the Access Gateway. If users select the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, the plug-in starts and users are logged on. For more information about configuring client choices, see Choosing the Client Access Method on page 160.

The Access Gateway client choices page with the Access Gateway Plug-in, Citrix XenApp, and clientless access icons

Showing the Client Choices Page at Logon

With the client choices option, users can log on using the Access Gateway Plugin, the Web Interface, or clientless access from one Web page after successful authentication to the Access Gateway. Users are presented with icons and can choose which method they want to use to establish a connection. You can also configure the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX or the Access Gateway Plugin for Java to appear on the choices page.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

183

Client choices can be used without using endpoint analysis or implementing access scenario fallback. If a client security expression is not defined, users receive connection options for the settings that are configured on the Access Gateway. If a client security expression exists for the user session and the client device fails the endpoint analysis scan, the choices page offers only the option to use the Web Interface if it is configured. Otherwise, users can log on using clientless access. Client choices are configured either globally or using a session profile and policy. Important: When configuring client choices, do not configure quarantine groups. Client devices that fail the endpoint analysis scan and are quarantined are treated the same as client devices that pass the endpoint scan.

To enable client choices options globally

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, click Advanced. On the General tab, click Client Choices and click OK twice.

You can also configure client choices as part of a session policy and then bind it to users, groups, and virtual servers.
To enable client choices as part of a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Client Experience tab, click Advanced. On the General tab, click Override Global, click Client Choices, click OK, and click Create. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, click General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

184

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Client Choices Options

In addition to enabling client choices using a session profile and policy, you need to configure the settings for the client software. For example, you want users to log on using either the Access Gateway Plug-in, Web Interface, or clientless access. You create one session profile that enables all three options and client choices. Then create a session policy with the expression set to True value with the profile attached. Then, bind the session policy to a virtual server. Before creating the session policy and profile, create an authorization group for users.
To create an authorization group

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Groups. In the details pane, click Add. In Group Name, type the name of the group. On the Users tab, select the users, click Add for each one, click Create, and click Close.

The following procedure is an example session profile for client choices with the Access Gateway Plug-in, Web Interface, and clientless access.
To create a session profile for client choices

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. In the details pane, on the Profiles tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Client Experience tab, do the following: A. B. C. D. E. Next to Home Page, click Override Global and clear Display Home Page. This disables the Access Interface. Next to Windows Plugin Type, click Override Global and select Access Gateway. Next to Clientless Access, click Override Global and select OFF. Next to Plugin Type, click Override Global and select Windows. Click Advanced and next to Client Choices, click Override Global, click Client Choices and click OK.

5.

On the Security tab, next to Default Authorization Action, click Override Global and select ALLOW.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

185

6. 7. 8.

On the Security tab, click Advanced. Under Authorization Groups, click Override Global, select the group, click Add, and click OK. On the Published Applications tab, do the following: A. B. C. D. Next to ICA Proxy, click Override Global and select OFF. Next to Web Interface Address, click Override Global and type the Web address of the Web Interface, such as [Link] Next to Web Interface Portal Mode, click Override Global and select COMPACT. Next to Single Sign-On Domain, click Override Global and type the name of the domain.

9.

Click Create and click Close.

If you want to use the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java as a client choice, on the Client Experience tab, in Plugin Type, select Java. If you select this choice, you must configure an intranet application and set the interception mode to Proxy. For more information about the interception mode, see To set the interception mode on page 173. If you want to use the Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX as a client choice, on the Client Experience tab, in Windows Plugin Type, select ActiveX. Do not make a selection in Plugin Type. After creating the session profile, create a session policy. Within the policy, select the profile and set the expression to True value. To use the Web Interface as a client choice, you must also configure the Secure Ticket Authority on the Access Gateway. The Secure Ticket Authority is bound to the virtual server. Note: If the server running the Web Interface is not available, the Citrix XenApp choice does not appear on the choices page.

To configure and bind the Secure Ticket Authority to a virtual server

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Virtual Servers and then expand a virtual server node. Click STA Servers. Under Related Tasks, click Bind new STA server. In URL, type the IP address or URL of the server running the STA and click Create.

186

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Note: The IP address or URL must match what is configured in the Web Interface.

Configuring Access Scenario Fallback

SmartAccess allows the Access Gateway to determine automatically the methods of access that are allowed for a client device based on the results of an endpoint analysis scan. Access scenario fallback further extends this capability by allowing a client device to fall back from the Access Gateway Plug-in to the Web Interface (using Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps) if the client device does not pass the initial endpoint analysis scan. To enable access scenario fallback, you configure a post-authentication policy that decides whether or not users receive an alternative method of access when logging on to the Access Gateway. This post-authentication policy is defined as a client security expression that is configured either globally or as part of a session profile. If you are configuring a session profile, it is associated to a session policy that is then bound to users, groups, virtual servers, or global. When this is enabled, the Access Gateway initiates an endpoint analysis scan after user authentication. The results for client devices that do not meet the requirements of a fallback post-authentication scan are as follows: If client choices is enabled, users can log on using the Web Interface only If clientless access and client choices are disabled, users can be quarantined into a group that provides access only to the Web Interface If clientless access and the Web Interface are enabled on the Access Gateway and ICA proxy is disabled, users fall back to clientless access If the Web Interface is not configured and clientless access is set to allow, users fall back to clientless access

When clientless access is disabled, the following combination of settings must be configured for the access scenario fallback: Define client security parameters for the fallback post-authentication scan Define the Web Interface home page Disable client choices If client devices fail the client security check, users are placed into a quarantine group that allows access only to the Web Interface and published applications

Chapter 9 To create a quarantine group

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

187

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Groups. In the details pane, click Add. In Group Name, type a name for the group, click Create, and click Close. Important: The name of the quarantine group must not match the name of any domain group to which users might belong. If the quarantine group matches an Active Directory group name, users are quarantined even if the client device passes the endpoint analysis security scan.

After creating the group, configure the Access Gateway to fall back to the Web Interface if the client device fails the endpoint analysis scan.
To configure the Web Interface for quarantined user connections

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. In the Global Access Gateway Settings dialog box, on the Published Applications tab, next to ICA Proxy, select OFF. Next to Web Interface Address, type the Web address for the Web Interface. Next to Single Sign-On Domain, type the name of your Active Directory domain and click OK.

After configuring the global settings, create a session policy that overrides the global ICA proxy setting and then bind the session policy to the quarantine group.
To create a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session. On the Policies tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. On the Published Applications tab, next to ICA Proxy, click Override Global, select On, and click Create.

188

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

6.

In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

To bind the session policy to the quarantine group

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Groups. In the details pane, select a group and click Open. On the Policies tab, select the policy and click OK.

After creating the session policy and profile enabling the Web Interface on the Access Gateway, create a global client security policy.
To create a global client security policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Security tab, click Advanced. Under Client Security, click New. In the Create Expression dialog box, next Match Any Expression, click Add, configure the client security expression and click Create. In Quarantine Group, select the group you configured in the group procedure and click OK twice.

When configuring access scenario fallback, use the following guidelines: Using client choices or access scenario fallback requires the endpoint analysis plug-in (an ActiveX control) for all users. If endpoint analysis cannot run or if users select Skip Scan during the scan, users are denied access. When client choices is enabled, if the client device fails endpoint analysis, users are placed into the quarantine group. Users can continue to log on using either the Access Gateway Plug-in or the Web Interface. Important: Citrix recommends that you do not create a quarantine group if client choices is enabled. If the endpoint analysis scan fails and the user is put in the quarantine group, the policies that are bound to the quarantine group are effective only

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

189

if there are no policies bound directly to the user that has an equal or lower priority number than the policies bound to the quarantine group. You can use different Web addresses for the Access Interface and the Web Interface. When both are configured, the home page takes precedence for the Access Gateway Plug-in and the Web Interface home page takes precedence for Web Interface users.

Using the Repeater Plug-in

When users log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in, the connection can be optimized using the Repeater Plug-in. When the connection is optimized, network traffic is compressed and accelerated through the Access Gateway. When Branch Repeater is enabled for a connection, TCP compression policies on the Access Gateway are disabled. The Repeater Plug-in is deployed and works with the Access Gateway Plug-in. The Access Gateway supports Version 4.3.26 or later of the Repeater Plug-in. Branch Repeater optimization and flow control take precedence over Access Gateway optimization features that require dynamic content modification. If Branch Repeater optimization is enabled for HTTP traffic, these Access Gateway features are not available: Single sign-on to Web applications File type association HTTP authorization

Network traffic destined for a configured HTTP port on the Access Gateway is excluded automatically from Branch Repeater optimization. This is the default setting. If you configure a traffic policy for Branch Repeater optimization on an HTTP port, the traffic policy is honored and the network traffic is optimized by Branch Repeater. However, the Access Gateway optimization features are disabled for all traffic affected by that policy. Network traffic destined for nonHTTP ports can be accelerated by Branch Repeater without affecting other Access Gateway features. Configuring client connections to use the Repeater Plug-in is accomplished using a traffic policy and can be bound to users, groups, virtual servers, or globally. The policy is prioritized based on where it is bound or by the priority number.
To configure traffic policy for the Repeater Plug-in

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Traffic.

190

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the details pane, on the Policies tab, click Add. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New In Name, type a name for the profile. In WanScaler, select On and click Create. In the Create Traffic Policy dialog box, next to Add Expression, select or enter an expression that represents the traffic types for which Branch Repeater acceleration should be enabled, click Add Expression, click Create and click Close.

When adding an expression, choose a network expression to use the same IP addresses and port ranges for which the Branch Repeater is configured to accelerate. For Branch Repeater acceleration to occur, the traffic types configured on the Access Gateway must match the Service Class Policies configured on the Branch Repeater. All TCP traffic benefits from Branch Repeater acceleration. If you are planning to use single sign-on, do not accelerate HTTP traffic since the acceleration disables single sign-on. After creating the policy, bind it to a user, group, virtual server, or globally.

How SmartAccess Works

To configure SmartAccess, you need to configure Access Gateway settings on the Web Interface and configure session policies on the Access Gateway. When you run the Published Applications Wizard, you can select the session policies you created for SmartAccess. When a user types the Web address of a virtual server, any preauthentication policies that are configured are downloaded to the client device. The Access Gateway sends the preauthentication and session policy names to the Web Interface as filters. If the policy condition is set to true, the policy is always sent as a filter name. If the policy condition is not met, the filter name is not set. This allows you to differentiate the list of published applications and the effective policies on a computer running Presentation Server based on the results of the endpoint analysis. The Web Interface contacts the server running Presentation Server or XenApp and returns the application list to the user. Any applications that have filters applied do not appear in the users application list unless the condition of the filter is met.

Chapter 9

Access Gateway Client Connection Methods

191

Smart Access endpoint analysis can be configured on the Access Gateway. To configure endpoint analysis, create a session policy that enables the ICA proxy setting and then configure a client security string. When the session policy is configured, you can bind the policy to users, groups, virtual servers, and globally. When the user logs on, the endpoint analysis policy runs a security check of the client device with the client security strings configured on the Access Gateway. Configure a client security expression. For example, you want to check for a specific version of Sophos Antivirus. In the expression editor, the client security strings appears as:
[Link](sophos).version == 10.0.2

After the policy is configured, bind it to a user, group, virtual server, or globally. When users log on, the SmartAccess policy check starts and verifies whether or not if the client device has Version 10.0.2 or higher of Sophos Antivirus installed. When the SmartAccess endpoint analysis check is successful, the Web Interface portal appears in case of a clientless session; otherwise, the normal Access Gateway home page appears. For more information about configuring SmartAccess, see the Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop

192

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

C HAPTER 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

Client connections are configured by defining the resources users can access in the internal network. Configuring client connections includes: Defining the domains to which users are allowed access Configuring IP addresses for users, including IP pooling Configuring time-out settings Configuring single sign-on Configuring network resources Configuring split tunneling Configuring connections through a proxy server Configuring client software to connect through the Access Gateway

Most client connections are configured using a profile that is part of a session policy. You can also define client connection settings using preauthentication and traffic policies. In This Chapter How User Connections Work Connecting to Internal Network Resources Enabling Proxy Support for Client Connections Configuring Time-Out Settings Configuring Single Sign-On Configuring Client Interception Configuring IP Pooling Configuring Split Tunneling

194

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Name Service Resolution Supporting Voice over IP Phones Configuring Application Access for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java

How User Connections Work

The Access Gateway operates as follows: When users attempt to access network resources across the VPN tunnel, the Access Gateway Plug-in encrypts all network traffic destined for the organizations internal network and forwards the packets to the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway terminates the SSL tunnel, accepts any incoming traffic destined for the private network, and forwards the traffic to the private network. The Access Gateway sends traffic back to the remote computer over a secure tunnel.

When users type the Web address, they receive a logon page where users enter their credentials and log on. If the credentials are correct, the Access Gateway finishes the handshake with the client. If the user is behind a proxy server, the user can specify the proxy server and authentication credentials. For more information, see Enabling Proxy Support for Client Connections on page 198. The Access Gateway Plug-in is installed on the client device. After the first connection, if users are logging on using a Windows-based computer, they can use the icon in the notification area to establish the connection.

Establishing the Secure Tunnel

After the Access Gateway Plug-in is started, it establishes a secure tunnel over port 443 (or any configured port on the Access Gateway) and sends authentication information. When the tunnel is established, the Access Gateway sends configuration information to the Access Gateway Plug-in describing the networks to be secured and containing an IP address if you enabled IP pooling. For more information about IP pooling see Configuring IP Pooling on page 208.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

195

Tunneling Private Network Traffic over Secure Connections

When the Access Gateway Plug-in is started and the user is authenticated, all network traffic destined for specified private networks is captured and redirected over the secure tunnel to the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway intercepts all network connections made by the client device and multiplexes/tunnels them over SSL to the Access Gateway, where the traffic is demultiplexed and the connections are forwarded to the correct host and port combination. The connections are subject to administrative security policies that apply to a single application, a subset of applications, or an entire network. You specify the resources (ranges of IP address/subnet pairs) that remote users can access through the VPN connection. All IP packets, regardless of protocol, are intercepted and transmitted over the secure link. Connections from local applications on the client device are securely tunneled to the Access Gateway, which reestablishes the connections to the target server. Target servers view connections as originating from the local Access Gateway on the private network, thus hiding the client IP address. Hiding IP addresses adds security to source locations.

Operation through Firewalls and Proxies

Users of the Access Gateway Plug-in are sometimes located inside another organizations firewall, as shown in the following illustration.

Access Gateway Plug-in connection through two firewalls

196

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

NAT firewalls maintain a table that allows them to route secure packets from the Access Gateway to the client device. For circuit-oriented connections, the Access Gateway maintains a port-mapped, reverse NAT translation table. The reverse NAT translation table enables the Access Gateway to match connections and send packets over the tunnel to the client with the correct port numbers so that the packets return to the correct application.

Terminating the Secure Tunnel and Returning Packets to the Client

The Access Gateway terminates the SSL tunnel and accepts any incoming packets destined for the private network. If the packets meet the authorization and access control criteria, the Access Gateway regenerates the packet IP headers so that they appear to originate from the Access Gateways private network IP address range or the client-assigned private IP address. The Access Gateway then transmits the packets to the network. Note: The Access Gateway Plug-in maintains two tunnels: an SSL tunnel over which data is sent to the Access Gateway and a tunnel between the client device and local applications. The encrypted data that arrives over the SSL tunnel is then decrypted before being sent to the local application over the second tunnel. If you run a packet sniffer such as WireShark on the computer where the Access Gateway Plug-in is running, you will see unencrypted traffic that appears to be between the client device and the Access Gateway. That unencrypted traffic, however, is not over the tunnel between the client device and the Access Gateway but rather the tunnel to the local applications. When an application client connects to its application server, certain protocols might require that the application server in turn attempt to create a new connection with the client. In this case, the client sends its known local IP address to the server by means of a custom client-server protocol. For these applications, the Access Gateway Plug-in provides the local client application a private IP address representation that the Access Gateway uses on the internal network. Many real-time voice applications and FTP use this feature.

Supporting the Access Gateway Plug-in

To enable users to connect to and use the Access Gateway, you need to provide them with the following information: Access Gateway Web address, such as [Link]

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

197

Path to any network drives that the users can access, which is done by mapping a network drive on their computer Any system requirements for running the Access Gateway Plug-in if you configured end point policies If a user runs a firewall on the remote computer, the user might need to change the firewall settings so that it does not block traffic to or from the IP addresses corresponding to the resources for which you granted access. The Access Gateway Plug-in automatically handles Internet Connection Firewall in Windows XP and Windows Firewall in Windows XP Service Pack 2.

Because users work with files and applications just as if they were local to the organizations network, no retraining of users or configuration of applications is needed.

Connecting to Internal Network Resources

The Access Gateway can be configured for users to access resources in the internal network. If split tunneling is disabled, all client traffic is sent to the Access Gateway and authorization policies determine whether the traffic is allowed to pass through to internal network resources. When split tunneling is enabled, only traffic destined for the internal network is intercepted by the client and sent to the gateway. You configure which IP addresses are intercepted using intranet applications. If you are using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows, set the interception mode to transparent. If you are using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, set the interception mode to proxy. When the interception mode is set to transparent, you can allow access to network resources using: A single IP address and subnet mask A range of IP addresses

If you set the interception mode to proxy, you can configure destination and source IP addresses and port numbers.
To configure network resources

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Resources and click Intranet Applications. In the details pane, click Add. Complete the parameters for allowing network access, click Create and click Close.

198

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

For more information about configuring specific settings for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows or Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, see Configuring Client Interception on page 206.

Enabling Proxy Support for Client Connections

The client device can connect through a proxy server for access to internal networks. The Access Gateway supports the HTTP, SSL, FTP, and SOCKS protocols. The IP address and port used by the proxy server should be specified on the Access Gateway. The proxy server is used as a forward proxy for all further connections to the internal network.
To configure proxy support for client connections

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. Under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, click Advanced. On the Proxy tab, under Proxy Settings, select On. For the protocols, type the IP address and port number and click OK twice.

Note: If you select Appliance you can configure only proxy servers that support secure and unsecure HTTP connections. After you enable proxy support on the Access Gateway, configuration details for the proxy server corresponding to the protocol should be specified on the client device. When proxy support is enabled, the Access Gateway sends the proxy server details to the client browser and changes the proxy configuration on the browser itself. After the client connects to the Access Gateway, it can communicate with the proxy server directly for connection to the clients network. You can configure one proxy server to support all of the protocols used by the Access Gateway. This provides one IP address and port combination for all of the protocols.
To configure one proxy server to use all protocols for the Access Gateway

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. Under Settings, click Change global settings.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

199

3. 4. 5. 6.

On the Client Experience tab, click Advanced. On the Proxy tab, under Proxy Settings, select On. For the protocols, type the IP address and port number. Click Use the same proxy server for all protocols and click OK twice.

When split tunneling is disabled and all proxy settings are set to On, proxy settings are propagated to client devices. If proxy settings are set to Appliance, the settings are not propagated to client devices. The Access Gateway makes connections to the proxy server on behalf of the client. The proxy settings are not propagated to the client browser, so no direct communication between the client and the proxy server is possible.
To configure the Access Gateway to be a proxy server

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. Under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, click Advanced. On the Proxy tab, under Proxy Settings, select Appliance. For the protocols, type the IP address and port number and click OK twice.

Note: When the Access Gateway is configured as a proxy server, unsecure and secure HTTP are the only supported protocols.

Configuring Time-Out Settings

You can configure the Access Gateway Plug-in to force a disconnection with the Access Gateway if there is no activity on the connection for a specified number of minutes. One minute before a session times out (disconnects), the user receives an alert indicating the session will close. If the session closes, the user must log on again. There are three time-out options: Forced time-out. If you enable this setting, the Access Gateway Plug-in disconnects after the time-out interval elapses regardless of what the user is doing. There is no action the user can take to prevent the disconnection from occurring when the time-out interval elapses. The default setting is 30 minutes. If this setting is zero, the setting is disabled.

200

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Session time-out. If you enable this setting, the user session times out if there is no mouse or keyboard activity on the client device for the specified interval. The default time-out setting is 30 minutes. If this value is set to zero, session time-out is disabled. Idle session time-out. If you enable this setting, the user session times out if network traffic is not detected. The default setting is zero.

You can enable any of these settings by entering a value between 1 and 65536 to specify a number of minutes for the time-out interval. If you enable more than one of these settings, the first time-out interval to elapse closes the client connection. You configure time-out settings using a session profile. When the profile is added to a session policy, the policy is then bound to a user, group, virtual server, or globally. If you want to configure client time-out settings globally, use the configuration utility. When the time-out settings are configured globally, the settings are applied to all user sessions. You can configure a forced time-out globally or as part of a session policy.
To configure a global forced time-out

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Network Configuration tab, click Advanced. Under Timeouts, in Forced Time-out (mins), type the number of minutes users can stay connected. In Forced Time-out Warning (mins), type the number of minutes before users are warned that the connection is due to be disconnected and click OK twice.

If you want to have further control over who receives the forced time-out, create a session policy and then apply the policy to a user or group.
To configure a forced time-out within a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

201

5. 6. 7. 8.

In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Network Configuration tab, click Advanced. Under Timeouts, click Override Global and in Forced Time-out (mins) type the number of minutes users can stay connected. Next to Forced Time-out Warning (mins), click Override Global and type the number of minutes users are warned that the connection is due to be disconnected. Click OK and click Create. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

9.

You can also configure session and client time-out settings globally using the configuration utility. To apply these values to a user, group, or virtual server use the Access Gateway Policy Manager and create a session policy and profile, setting the expression to true.
To configure a global session or client idle time-out

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. Do one or both of the following: On the Client Experience tab, in Session Time-out (mins), type the number of minutes In Client Idle Time-out (mins), type the number of minutes and click OK

To configure session or client idle time-out settings using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. Do one or both of the following: On the Client Experience tab, next to Session Time-out (mins), click Override Global and then type the number of minutes

202

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

7.

Next to Client Idle Time-out (mins), click Override Global, type the number of minutes, and click Create

In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

Configuring Single Sign-On

You can configure the Access Gateway to support single sign-on with Windows, to Web applications (such as SharePoint), file shares and to the Web Interface. Single sign-on also applies to file shares that are accessed through the file transfer utility in the Access Interface or from the Access Gateway icon menu in the notification area. If single sign-on is configured when users log on, they are automatically logged on again without having to supply their credentials a second time.

Configuring Single Sign-On with Windows

Users open a connection by starting the Access Gateway Plug-in from the desktop. You can specify that the Access Gateway Plug-in start automatically when the user logs on to Windows by enabling single sign-on. When single signon is configured, users Windows logon credentials are passed to the Access Gateway for authentication. Enable single sign-on only if client devices are logging on to your organizations domain. If single sign-on is enabled and a user connects from a device that is not on your domain, the user is prompted to log on. If the Access Gateway Plug-in is configured for single sign-on with Windows, the plug-in automatically starts after the user logs on to Windows. The users Windows logon credentials are passed to the Access Gateway for authentication. Enabling single sign-on for the Access Gateway Plug-in facilitates operations on the client device such as installation scripts and automatic drive mapping. When single sign-on is configured, users Windows logon credentials are passed to the Access Gateway for authentication. Single sign-on with Windows is configured either globally or using a session profile that is attached to a session policy.
To configure single sign-on with Windows globally

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

203

3.

On the Client Experience tab, click Single Sign-on with Windows and click OK.

To configure single sign-on with Windows using a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. On the Client Experience tab, next to Single Sign-On with Windows, click Override Global, click Single Sign-on with Windows, and click OK. Create the session policy expression, click Create, and click Close.

5.

Configuring Single Sign-On to Web Applications

The Access Gateway can be configured to provide single sign-on to servers in the internal network that use Web-based authentication. With single sign-on, you can redirect the user to a custom home page, such as a SharePoint site or to the Web Interface. You can also configure single sign-on to resources through the Access Gateway Plug-in from a bookmark configured on the home page or a Web address users type in the Web browser. If you are redirecting the home page to a SharePoint site or Web Interface, provide the Web address for the site. When users are authenticated, either by the Access Gateway or an external authentication server, users are redirected to the specified home page and logged automatically on. User credentials are passed transparently to the Web server. If the credentials are accepted by the Web server, users are logged on automatically. If the credentials are denied by the Web server, users receive an authentication prompt asking for their user name and password. You can configure single sign-on to Web applications globally or using a session policy.
To configure single sign-on to Web applications globally

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Client Experience tab, click Single Sign-on to Web Applications and click OK.

204

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To configure single sign-on to Web applications using a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Session Policies and select a policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify session policy. In the Configure Session Policy dialog box, next to Request Profile, click Modify. On the Client Experience tab, next to Single Sign-On to Web Applications, click Global Override, click Single Sign-On to Web Applications, and click OK.

Single sign-on is attempted only for network traffic where the destination port is considered an HTTP port. To allow single sign-on to applications that use a port other than port 80 for HTTP traffic, add the other port number(s) on the Access Gateway. You can enable multiple ports. The ports are configured globally.
To define the HTTP port for single sign-on to Web applications

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Network Configuration tab, click Advanced. Under HTTP Ports, type the port number, click Add, and click OK twice.

Note: If Web applications in the internal network use public IP addresses, single sign-on does not function. To enable single sign-on, split tunneling must be enabled as part of the global policy setting, regardless if clientless access or the Access Gateway Plug-in is used for client connections. If it is not possible to enable split tunneling on a global level, create a virtual server that use a private address range.

Configuring Single Sign-On to Web Applications Using LDAP

When single sign-on is configured and users log on using the user principal name (UPN) with a format of username@[Link], by default single sign-on fails and users must authenticate twice. If you need to use this format for user logon, modify the LDAP authentication policy to accept this form of user name.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

205

To configure LDAP authentication for single sign-on to Web applications

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Authentication Policies and select the LDAP policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify authentication policy. In the Configure Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Server, click Modify. Under LDAP Server Information, in Base DN (location of users), type DC=domainname, DC=com. In Administrator Bind DN, type LDAPaccount@[Link], where [Link] is the name of your domain. In Administrator Password and Confirm Administrator Password, type the password. In Server Logon Name Attribute, type UserPrincipalName. In Group Attribute, type memberOf. In Sub Attribute Name, type CN. In SSO Name Attribute, type the format of how users logon and click OK twice. This value is either SamAccountName or UserPrincipleName.

Configuring Single Sign-On to a Domain

If users are connecting to servers running Citrix XenApp and using SmartAccess, you can configure single sign-on for users connecting to the server farm. When you are configuring access to published applications using a session policy and profile, use the domain name for the server farm. You can also configure single sign-on to file shares in your network.
To configure single sign-on to a domain for Citrix XenApp and file shares

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, expand Session Policies and select the policy for your published applications. Under Related Tasks, click Modify session policy. In the Configure Session Policy dialog box, next to Request Profile, click Modify. In the Configure Session Profile dialog box, on the Published Applications tab, in Single-sign-on Domain, click Override Global, type the domain name, and click OK twice.

2. 3. 4.

206

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

For more information about configuring the Access Gateway with XenApp, see Citrix Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Integration Guide for Citrix XenApp and Citrix XenDesktop.

Configuring Client Interception

Network interception rules on the Access Gateway are configured using intranet applications. By default, when the system IP address, a mapped IP address, or a subnet IP address is configured on the appliance, subnet routes are created based on these IP addresses. Intranet applications are created automatically based on these routes and can be bound to a virtual server. If split tunneling is enabled, intranet applications must be defined for client interception to occur.

Configuring Intranet Applications for the Access Gateway Plug-in

You create profiles for user access to resources by defining the following: Creating access to one IP address and subnet mask Creating access to a range of IP addresses

When an intranet application is defined on the Access Gateway, client traffic that is destined to the resource is intercepted by the Access Gateway Plug-in and sent through the Access Gateway. When configuring intranet applications, consider the following: Intranet applications do not need to be defined if the following conditions are met: Interception mode is set to transparent Users are connecting to the Access Gateway using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows Split tunneling is disabled

When authorization is allowed, the Access Gateway passes through all the traffic destined to network resources. For improved security and tighter access control, create authorization policies to explicitly allow or deny user access to internal resources. If users are connecting to the Access Gateway using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, intranet applications must be defined. The Access Gateway Plug-in for Java intercepts traffic only to network resources defined by intranet applications. If clients are using this plug-in, set the interception mode to proxy.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

207

When configuring an intranet application, an interception mode must be selected that corresponds to the type of client software used to make connections. Note: An intranet application cannot be configured for both proxy and transparent interception. To configure a network resource to be used by both clients, configure two intranet application policies and bind the policies to the user, group, virtual server or Access Gateway global.

To create an intranet application for one IP address

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Intranet Applications. Under Related Tasks, click Create new intranet application. In Name, type a name for the profile. Under Options, next to Interception Mode, select Transparent. In Protocol, select the protocol that applies to the network resource. Under Destination, click Specify an IP Address and Netmask. In IP Address, type the IP address and in Netmask, type the subnet mask, click Create, and click Close.

If you have multiple servers in your network, such as Web, email, and file shares, you can configure a network resource that includes the IP range for network resources. This allows users access to the network resources contained in the IP address range.
To configure an IP address range

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Intranet Applications. Under Related Tasks, click Create new intranet application. In Name, type a name for the profile. Under Options, next to Interception Mode, select Transparent. In Protocol, select the protocol that applies to the network resource. Under Destination, click Specify an IP Address Range. In IP Start, type the starting IP address and in IP End, type the ending IP address, click Create, and click Close.

208

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Intranet Applications for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java
If clients are using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java to connect, an intranet application must be configured and set to proxy interception. The client software intercepts traffic by using the client device loopback IP address and port number specified in the profile. If users are connecting from a Windows-based device, the Access Gateway Plugin for Java attempts to modify the host file by setting the application host name to access the loopback IP address and port specified in the profile. Users must have administrative privileges on the client device for host file modification. If users are connecting from a non-Windows device, applications must be configured manually using the source IP address and port values specified in the intranet application profile.
To configure an intranet application for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Intranet Applications. Under Related Tasks, click Create new intranet application. In Name, type a name for the profile. Under Options, next to Interception Mode, select Proxy. Under Destination, in IP Address and Port, type the destination IP address and port. Under Source, in IP Address and Port, type the source IP address and port. Note: The source IP address should be set to the loopback IP address of [Link]. If an IP address is not specified, the loopback IP address is used. If a port value is not entered, the destination port value is used.

Configuring IP Pooling
In some situations, users connecting using the Access Gateway Plug-in need a unique IP address for the Access Gateway. For example, in a Samba environment, each user connecting to a mapped network drive needs to appear to originate from a different IP address. When you enable IP pooling for a group, the Access Gateway can assign a unique IP address alias to each client.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

209

IP pooling is configured using intranet IP addresses. The following types of applications might need to use a unique IP address that is drawn from the IP pool: Voice over IP Active FTP Instant messaging Secure shell (SSH) Virtual network computing (VNC) to connect to a client desktop Remote desktop (RDP) to connect to a client desktop

You can configure the Access Gateway to assign an internal IP address to clients connecting to the Access Gateway. Static IP addresses can be assigned to users or a range of IP addresses can be assigned to a group, virtual server, or to the system globally. The Access Gateway allows you to assign IP addresses from your internal network to your remote clients. A remote client can be addressed by an IP address on the internal network. If you choose to use a range of IPs, the system dynamically assigns an IP address from that range to a remote client on-demand. When configuring IP pooling, be aware of the following: Assigned IP addresses need to be routed correctly. To ensure the correct routing consider the following: If split tunneling is not enabled, make sure that the IP addresses can be routed through network address translation (NAT) devices Any servers accessed by client connections with intranet IP addresses must have the proper gateways configured to reach those networks Configure gateways or a static route on the Access Gateway so that network traffic from clients is routed to the internal network

Only contiguous subnet masks can be used when assigning IP address ranges. A subset of a range can be assigned to a lower-level entity. For example, if an IP address range is bound to a virtual server, bind a subset of the range to a group. IP address ranges cannot be bound to multiple entities within a binding level. For example, a subset of an address range that is bound to a group cannot be bound to a second group. The Access Gateway does not allow you to remove or unbind IP addresses while they are actively in use by a client session.

210

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Internal network IP addresses are assigned to users using the following hierarchy: Users direct binding Group assigned address pool Virtual server assigned address pool Global range of addresses

Only contiguous subnet masks can be used in assigning address ranges. However, a subset of an assigned range might be further assigned to a lower level entity. A bound global address range can have a range bound to the following: Virtual server Group User

A bound virtual server address range can have a subset bound to the following: Group User

A bound group address range can have a subset bound to a user. When an IP address is assigned to a user, it is reserved for the users next logon until the IP pool range is exhausted. When the addresses are exhausted, the Access Gateway reclaims the IP address from the user who is logged off from the Access Gateway the longest. If an address cannot be reclaimed and all addresses are actively in use, the Access Gateway does not allow the user to log on. You can prevent this situation by allowing the Access Gateway to use the mapped IP address as an intranet IP address when all other IP addresses are not available. IP pooling is configured using the configuration utility at the level to which you want to bind the policy. For example, if you want to create an IP address pool for a virtual server, configure the intranet IP addresses on that node. When the IP pool is configured, it is bound to the entity where it is configured.
To configure IP pooling for a user, group or virtual server using the configuration utility

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway, and then click Users, Groups or Virtual Servers.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

211

2. 3. 4.

In the details pane, click a user, group, or virtual server and click Open. On the Intranet IPs tab, in IP Address and Netmask, type the IP address and subnet mask; click Add. Repeat Step 3 for each IP address you want to add to the pool and then click OK.

You can also create an IP address pool and bind it globally on the Access Gateway using the configuration utility.
To configure IP pooling globally using the configuration utility

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Intranet IPs, click To assign a unique, static IP Address or pool of IP Addresses for use by all client Access Gateway sessions, configure Intranet IPs. In IP Address and Netmask, type the IP address and subnet mask and click Add. Repeat Step 3 for each IP address you want to add to the pool and then click OK.

3. 4.

Defining the IP Pooling Options

You can use a session policy or the global Access Gateway settings to control whether or not intranet IP addresses are assigned during a client session. This allows you to assign intranet IP addresses to the Access Gateway, while disabling the use of intranet IP addresses for a particular group of users. There are three options to configure intranet IP pools using a session policy: Nospillover. When intranet IP addresses are enabled and the mapped IP address is not used, the Transfer Login page appears for users who have used all available intranet IP addresses. Spillover. When IP pooling is configured and the mapped IP is used as an intranet IP address, the mapped IP address is used when an intranet IP address cannot be assigned. Off. IP pooling is not configured.

To configure the IP pooling options

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy.

212

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Network Configuration tab, click Advanced. Next to Intranet IP, click Override Global and then select the option. If you selected SPILLOVER in Step 7, next to Mapped IP, click Override Global, select the host name of the appliance, click OK, and click Create. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, create an expression, click Create, and click Close.

9.

Using the Transfer Login Page

If a user does not have an intranet IP address available and then tries to establish another session with the Access Gateway, the Transfer Login page appears. The Transfer Login page allows users to replace their existing Access Gateway session with a new session. The Transfer Login page can also be used if the logoff request is lost or if the client does not perform a clean logoff. For example: A user is assigned a static intranet IP address and has an existing Access Gateway session. If the user tries to establish a second session from a different device, the Transfer Login page appears and the user can transfer the session to the new device. A user is assigned five intranet IP addresses and has five sessions through the Access Gateway. If the user tries to establish a sixth session, the Transfer Login page appears and the user can choose to replace an existing session with a new session.

Note: If the user does not have an assigned IP address available and a new session cannot be established using the Transfer Login page, the user receives an error message. The Transfer Login page appears only if intranet IP addresses are configured and spillover is disabled.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

213

Configuring a DNS Suffix

When a user logs on to the Access Gateway and is assigned an IP address, a DNS record for the user name and IP address combination is added to the Access Gateway DNS cache. You can configure a DNS suffix to append to the user name when the DNS record is added to the cache. This allows users to be referenced by the DNS name, which can be easier to remember than an IP address. When the user logs off from the Access Gateway, the record is removed from the DNS cache.
To configure a DNS suffix

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies and select a session policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify session policy. Next to Request Profile, click Modify. On the Network Configuration tab, click Advanced. Next to Intranet IP DNS Suffix, click Override Global, type the DNS suffix, and click OK three times.

Enabling Spoof Intranet IP

This setting enables applications, such as Voice over IP (VoIP) softphones, to detect the local IP address and return it to the IP Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or other callers. The intranet IP address is returned to the VoIP application instead of the client device IP address. This setting is enabled by default.
To enable or disable spoof intranet IP

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies and select a session policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify session policy. Next to Request Profile, click Modify. On the Network Configuration tab, click Advanced. Next to Spoof Intranet IP, click Override Global and click Spoof Intranet IP. Next to Spoof Intranet IP, clear the check box to disable, or select the check box to enable, and click OK three times.

214

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Split Tunneling

You can enable split tunneling to prevent the Access Gateway Plug-in from sending unnecessary network traffic to the Access Gateway. When split tunneling is not enabled, the Access Gateway Plug-in captures all network traffic originating from a client device and sends the traffic through the VPN tunnel to the Access Gateway. If you enable split tunneling, the Access Gateway Plug-in sends only traffic destined for networks protected by the Access Gateway through the VPN tunnel. The Access Gateway Plug-in does not send network traffic destined for unprotected networks to the Access Gateway. When the Access Gateway Plug-in starts, it obtains the list of intranet applications from the Access Gateway. The Access Gateway Plug-in examines all packets transmitted on the network from the client device and compares the addresses within the packets to the list of intranet applications. If the destination address in the packet is within one of the intranet applications, the Access Gateway Plug-in sends the packet through the VPN tunnel to the Access Gateway. If the destination address is not in a defined intranet appication, the packet is not encrypted and the client routes the packet appropriately. When split tunneling is enabled, intranet applications define the network traffic that is intercepted. Note: If clients are going to connect to published applications in a server farm using Citrix XenApp online plugins, split tunneling does not need to be configured. The Access Gateway also supports reverse split tunneling, which defines the network traffic that is not intercepted by the Access Gateway. If split tunneling is set to reverse, intranet applications define the network traffic that is not intercepted. When this is enabled, all network traffic directed to internal IP addresses bypasses the VPN tunnel, while other traffic goes through the Access Gateway. Reverse split tunneling can be used to log all non-local LAN traffic. For example, if users have a home wireless network and are logged on using the Access Gateway Plug-in, network traffic destined to a printer or another device within the wireless network is not intercepted. For more information about intranet applications, see Configuring Client Interception on page 206. Split tunneling is configured as part of the session policy.

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

215

To configure split tunneling

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies and select a session policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify session policy. Next to Request Profile, click Modify. On the Client Experience tab, next to Split Tunnel, select Global Override, select the option from the drop-down list and click OK twice.

Configuring Split Tunneling and Authorization

When planning your Access Gateway deployment, it is important to consider split tunneling and the default authorization action and authorization policies. For example, you have an authorization policy that allows access to a network resource. Split tunneling is set to on and intranet applications are not configured to send network traffic through the Access Gateway. When this type of configuration is on the Access Gateway, access to the resource is allowed, but the resources cannot be accessed. If the authorization policy denies access to a network resource, split tunneling is set to on, and intranet applications are configured to route network traffic through the Access Gateway, the Access Gateway Plug-in sends traffic to the Access Gateway, but access to the resource is denied.

Configuring Name Service Resolution

During installation of the Access Gateway, you can use the Access Gateway wizard to configure additional settings including name service providers. The name service providers translate the FQDN (host name) to an IP address. In the Access Gateway wizard, you can configure a DNS or WINS server, set the priority of the DNS lookup, and the number of times to retry the connection to the server. You can direct users and groups to connect to a name resolution server than the that is different from the one originally configured using the Access Gateway wizard. You can add additional DNS and WINS servers to the Access Gateway configuration using a session policy. Before configuring an additional DNS server on the Access Gateway, create a virtual server that acts as a DNS server for name resolution.
To add a DNS or WINS server within a session profile

1.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Session.

216

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

2. 3.

In the details pane, on the Profiles tab, select a profile and click Open. On the Network Configuration tab, do one of the following: To configure a DNS server, next to DNS Virtual Server, click Override Global, select the server, and click OK twice To configure a WINS server, next to WINS Server IP, select Override Global, type the IP address, and click OK twice

Supporting Voice over IP Phones

Real-time applications, such as voice and video, are implemented over UDP. TCP is not appropriate for real-time traffic due to the delay introduced by acknowledgements and retransmission of lost packets. It is more important to deliver packets in real time than to ensure that all packets are delivered. However, with any tunneling technology over TCP, such real-time performances cannot be met. The Access Gateway overcomes this issue by routing UDP packets over the secure tunnel as special IP packets that do not require TCP acknowledgements. Even if the packets get lost in the network, no attempt is made by either the client device or the server to regenerate them, so real-time (UDP like) performance is achieved over a secure TCP-based tunnel. When the Access Gateway is installed as a standalone appliance and users connect using the Access Gateway Plug-in, two-way communication is supported with the following Voice over IP (VoIP) softphones: Cisco Softphone Avaya IP Softphone

Secure tunneling is supported between the IP PBX and the softphone software running on the client device. To enable the VoIP traffic to traverse the secure tunnel, you must install the Access Gateway Plug-in and one of the supported softphones on the same client device. When the VoIP traffic is sent over the secure tunnel, the following softphone features are supported: Outgoing calls that are placed from the IP softphone Incoming calls that are placed to the IP softphone Bidirectional voice traffic

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections for the Access Gateway Plug-in

217

Support for VoIP softphones is configured using intranet IP addresses. An intranet IP address must be configured for each user. If you are using Cisco Softphone Communication, after configuring the intranet IP address and binding it to a user, no additional configuration is required. For more information about configuring an intranet IP address, see Configuring IP Pooling on page 208. If split tunneling is enabled, create an intranet application and specify the Avaya Softphone application. In addition, transparent interception and spoof IP must be enabled. If you are using the Avaya IP Softphone and if split tunneling is disabled, spoof IP must be enabled, which is the default setting.

Configuring Application Access for the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java
You can configure the access level and the applications users are allowed to access in the secure network. If users are logged on using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, in the Secure Access Remote Session dialog box, users can click Applications. The Intranet Applications dialog box appears and lists all of the applications the user is authorized to access. When users are connected using the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java, there are two methods for accessing user applications: HOSTS File Modification Method SourceIP and SourcePort Method

Accessing Applications using the HOSTS File Modification Method

When this method is used, the Access Gateway Plug-in for Java adds an entry that corresponds to the applications configured by the administrator in the HOSTS file. To modify this file on a Windows-based device, you must be logged on as an administrator or have administrator privileges on the client device. If you are not logged on with administrator privileges, manually edit the HOSTS file adding the appropriate entries. Note: On a Windows computer, the HOSTS file is located in the following directory path: %systemroot%\system32\drivers\etc. On a Macintosh or Linux computer, the HOSTS file is located at /etc/hosts.

218

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

For example, you want to use Telnet to connect to a computer in the secure network. You use the remote computer to work both within your secure network and remotely, such as from home. The IP address should be the localhost IP address, [Link]. In the HOSTS file, add the IP address and the application name, such as: [Link] telnet1 When the HOSTS file is edited and saved on the client device, test your connection. You can test your connection by opening a command prompt and connecting using Telnet. If users are employing a client device that is not within the secure network, log on to the Access Gateway before starting Telnet.
To connect to a computer in the secure network

1. 2.

Start a Telnet session using the available software for your computer. From a command prompt, type:
Open telnet

The logon prompt of the remote computer appears.

Accessing Applications Using the SourceIP and SourcePort Method

If users need to access an application in the secure network and do not have administrative rights on the client device, configure the HOSTS file using the source IP address and port number that is located in the Intranet Applications dialog box.
To open the Intranet Applications dialog box and locate the IP address and port number

1. 2.

In the Secure Remote Access dialog box, click Applications. Find the application in the list and note the SourceIP address and SourcePort number.

When you have the IP address and port number, start a Telnet session to connect to the computer in the remote network.

C HAPTER 11

Configuring the Access Interface

The Access Gateway includes a home page that is a Web page that appears after users log on. The default home page is called the Access Interface. The home page can be the Access Interface, the Web Interface, or a customized home page. The Access Interface is used to provide links to Web sites, both internal and external, and links to file shares in the internal network. The Access Interface can be customized with the following: Changing the Access Interface Creating Access Interface links

Users can customize the Access Interface, adding their own links to Web sites and file shares. Users can also transfer files from the internal network to their device using the home page. Note: When users log on and attempt to open file shares from the Access Interface, the file share does not open and users receive the error message Failed to make TCP connection to the server. To resolve this problem, configure your firewall to allow traffic from the Access Gateway system IP address to the file server IP address on TCP ports 445 and 139.

220

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The Access Interface that is the default home page

Enabling the Access Interface or Customized Home Page

Home pages are configured using a session policy and then bound to a user, group, virtual server, or globally. To use the Access Interface, use a Web browser to connect with the Access Gateway Plug-in or clientless access.
To configure the Access Interface

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Client Experience tab, next to Home Page, click Override Global, click Display Home Page and then type the Web address of the home page. Next to Windows Plugin Type, click Override Global, select Access Gateway, and click Create.

Chapter 11

Configuring the Access Interface

221

8.

In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

After creating the session policy, bind it to a user, group, virtual server, or globally.

Changing the Access Interface

You might want to direct users to a customized home page, rather than relying on the Access Interface. To do this, install the home page on the Access Gateway and then configure the session policy to use the new home page.
To install a home page on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Customize Access Interface, click Upload the Access Interface. To install the home page from a file on a computer in your network, in Local File, click Browse, navigate to the file, and click Select. To use a home page that is installed on the Access Gateway, in Remote Path, click Browse, select the file, and click Select. Click Upload and click Close.

Creating and Applying Web and File Share Links

You can configure the Access Interface to display a set of links to internal resources that are available to users. Creating these links requires that you first define the links as resources and then bind them to a user, group, virtual server, or globally to make them active in the Access Interface. The links you create appear on the Web sites and File Shares panes under Enterprise Web Sites and Enterprise File Shares. If users add their own links, these appear under Personal Web Sites and Personal File Shares.
To create Access Interface links

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Resources / Policies, click Bookmarks. Under Related Tasks, click Create new bookmark. In Name, type a name for the bookmark. In Text to display, type the description of the link. The description appears on the home page.

5.

In Bookmark, type the Web address, click Create, and click Close.

222

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If clientless access is enabled, you can prevent requests for Web sites to go through the Access Gateway. For example, you added a bookmark for [Link] In the Add Bookmark dialog box, you can click Use Access Gateway as a reverse proxy. When this check box is enabled, Web site requests go from the client device to the Access Gateway and then to the Web site. When this check box is disabled, requests go from the client device to the Web site.
To bind an Access Interface link

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click a bookmark and drag-and-drop it to one, some, or all of the following locations: To bind a bookmark globally, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Access Gateway Global and drop the book mark in Bookmarks. To bind the bookmark to a virtual server, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Virtual Servers and then expand a virtual server. Drop the bookmark in Bookmarks. To bind the bookmark to a group, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Group and then expand a group node. Drop the bookmark in Bookmarks. To bind the bookmark to a user, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand Users and then expand a user node. Drop the bookmark in Bookmarks.

When the configuration is saved, the links are available to users in the Access Interface on the Home tab, which is the first page that users see after successfully logging on. The links are organized on the page according to type Web site links or file share links.

C HAPTER 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

Endpoint analysis is a process that scans a client device and detects information such as the presence and version level of operating system, antivirus, firewall, or Web browser software. You can use endpoint analysis to verify that the client device meets your requirements before allowing it to connect to your network or remain connected after users log on. You can monitor files, processes, and registry entries on the client device during the user session to ensure that the device continues to meet requirements. In This Chapter How Endpoint Policies Work Configuring Preauthentication Policies Configuring Post-Authentication Policies Configuring Client Security Preauthentication Expressions Configuring Compound Client Security Expressions

How Endpoint Policies Work

You can configure the Access Gateway to check if a client device meets certain security requirements before a user logs on. This is called a preauthentication policy. You can configure the Access Gateway to check for antivirus, firewall, antispam, processes, files, registry entries, Internet security, or operating systems. If the client device fails the preauthentication scan, users are not allowed to log on. This information can be included as a filter within an access policy or a connection policy. If you need to configure additional security requirements that are not used in a preauthentication policy, configure a session policy and bind it to a user or group. This is called a post-authentication policy. When this is configured, the Access Gateway sends a file to Internet Explorer that downloads the endpoint analysis plug-in and runs the post-authentication scan. If users are not using Internet Explorer, the Access Gateway Plug-in runs the post-authentication scan. Endpoint policies are configured using three types of policies:

224

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Preauthentication policies that use a yes or no parameter. Session policy that is conditional and can be used for SmartAccess Client security expression within a session policy

You can incorporate detected information into policies, enabling you to grant different levels of access based upon the client device. For example, you can provide full access with download permission to users who connect remotely using client devices that are current with antivirus and firewall software requirements. For users connecting from kiosks or untrusted computers, you can provide a more restricted level of access that allows editing the documents on remote servers without downloading them. Endpoint analysis performs these basic steps: Examines an initial set of information about the client device to determine which scans to apply Runs all applicable scans Compares property values detected on the client device with desired property values listed in your configured scans Produces an output verifying whether or not desired property values are found

When a user tries to connect, endpoint analysis checks the scans that are filtered for the endpoint policy. These scans return results (called scan outputs) of detected information or true or false results of required property values. Endpoint analysis completes before the user session uses a license. A preauthentication scan is the yes or no parameter to determine if the client device meets the specified requirements. If the scan fails, credentials cannot be entered on the logon page. A session policy is conditional and typically used for SmartAccess. Within the session policy, there is a client security expression. If the client device fails to meet the requirements of the client security expression, you can configure users to be placed into a quarantine group. If the client device passes the scan, users can be placed into a different group that might have additional checks.

System Requirements for Endpoint Analysis

If users are connecting using Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps, the endpoint analysis scan is completed using an ActiveX control. The ActiveX software is downloaded to the client device and the preauthentication scan is run. This works only on Windows-based client devices and when the client device is using Internet Explorer.

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

225

Evaluating Client Logon Options

When users log on, they can choose to skip the endpoint analysis scan. If users skip the scan, the Access Gateway processes this as a failed endpoint analysis. For example, you want to provide client access with network-layer access using the Access Gateway Plug-in. To log on to the Access Gateway, users must be running an antivirus application, such as Norton Antivirus. If the client device is not running the application, users can log on only to the Web Interface and use published applications. To configure the Access Gateway, assign a restrictive session policy as the default and then upgrade users to a privileged session policy when the client device passes the endpoint analysis scan. To configure the Access Gateway to enforce the restrictive session policy first, perform the following steps: Configure the global settings with ICA proxy enabled and all other settings needed if the specified application is not running on the client device Create a session policy and profile that enables the Access Gateway Plug-in Create an expression within the rule portion of the session policy to specify the application, such as:
([Link]([Link]) exists)

When users log on, the session policy is applied first. If endpoint analysis fails or the user skips the scan, the settings in the session policy are ignored and users have restricted access using the Web Interface or clientless access. If endpoint analysis passes, the session policy is applied and users have full access. If users skip the endpoint analysis scan, the expression in the session policy is considered false. Note: The instructions in this chapter are a general guideline for creating session policies for endpoint analysis. You can have many settings within a session policy. Specific instructions for configuring session policies are located throughout this manual. The instructions might contain directions for configuring a specific setting; however, that setting can be one of many that are contained within a session profile and policy.

226

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring Preauthentication Policies

The Access Gateway can be configured to check for client-side security before users are authenticated. This ensures that the client device that is establishing a session with the Access Gateway conforms to your security requirements. Clientside security checks are configured using preauthentication policies specific to a virtual server or globally. Preauthentication policies consist of a profile and an expression. Note: Preauthentication works only with Internet Explorer.

Configuring Preauthentication Profiles

A preauthentication policy includes a profile. The profile is configured using an action to allow or deny a process to execute on the client device. For example, the text file, [Link], is running on the client device. When the user logs on to the Access Gateway, you can either allow or deny access if this file is running. If you do not want to allow logon if the process is running, configure the profile so the process is stopped before users log on.
To configure a preauthentication profile using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway > Policies and click Pre-Authentication. In the details pane, on the Profiles tab, click Add. In Name, type the name of the application to be checked. In Action, select ALLOW or DENY. In Processes to be killed, type the name of the process to be stopped. In Files to be deleted, type the name of the file to be deleted, such as c:\[Link], click Create and click Close. Note: If a file is to be deleted or a process stopped, users receive a message asking for confirmation. Steps 5 and 6 are optional parameters.

If you configure a preauthentication profile using the configuration utility, you then create the preauthentication policy by clicking Add on the Policies tab. In the Create Pre-Authentication Policy dialog box, select the profile from the Request Profile drop-down list. You can also create a policy and profile together using the Access Gateway Policy Manager.

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

227

To create a preauthentication policy and profile using the Access Gateway Policy Manager

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Pre-Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new pre-authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, click New. In Name, type the name of the application to be checked. In Action, select ALLOW or DENY. In Processes to be killed, type the name of the process to be stopped. In Files to be deleted, type the name of the file to be deleted, such as c:\[Link], and click Create. Next to Named Expressions, select General, select True Value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

Configuring Endpoint Analysis Expressions

Preauthentication and client security session policies include a profile and an expression. The policy can have one profile and multiple expressions. To scan a client device for an application, file, process, or registry entry, you create an expression within the policy.

Types of Expressions
The expression consists of an expression type and the parameters of the expression. Expression types include: General Client security Network based

Adding Pre-Configured Expressions to a Preauthentication Policy

The Access Gateway comes with pre-configured expressions, called named expressions. When you are configuring a policy, you can use a named expression for the policy. For example, you want the preauthentication policy to check for Symantec AntiVirus 10 with updated virus definitions. Create a preauthentication policy and add the expression as described in the following procedure.

228

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

When you create a preauthentication or session policy, you can create the expression when you create the policy. You can then apply the policy, with the expression, to virtual servers or globally.
To use a named expression in a policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Pre-authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new pre-authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Request Profile, select or create a profile. Next to Named Expressions, select Anti-Virus, select Symantic AntiVirus 10 (with Updated Definition Files), click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

A preauthentication policy with a named client security expression

Configuring Custom Expressions

A custom expression is one that you create within the policy. When you create an expression, configure the parameters for the expression. You can also create custom client security expressions to refer to commonly used client security strings. This eases the process of configuring preauthentication policies and also in maintaining the configured expressions.

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

229

For example you want to create a custom client security expression for Symantec AntiVirus 10 and make sure that the virus definitions are no more than three days old. Create a new policy and then configure the expression to specify the virus definitions.
To create a custom expression within a preauthentication policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Pre-authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new pre-authentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile and in Action, select Allow. In the Create Pre-Authentication Policy dialog box, next to Match Any Expression, click Add. In Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the following: A. B. C. D. E. F. In Component, select Anti-Virus In Name, type a name for the application In Qualifier, select Version In Operator, select == In Value, type the value In Freshness, type 3 and click OK.

9.

In the Create Pre-Authentication Policy dialog box, click Create and click Close.

When a custom expression is configured, it is added to the Expression box in the policy dialog box, as shown in the following illustration:

230

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

A session policy with a configured antivirus expression

Configuring Multiple Expressions

The preauthentication policy can have one profile and multiple expressions. If multiple expressions are configured, you use operators to specify the conditions of the expression. For example, the client device must run one of the following antivirus applications: Symantec Antivirus 10 McAfee Antivirus 11 Sophos Antivirus 4

You can configure the expression with the or operator to check for these three applications. If the correct version of any of these applications is found on the client device, users are allowed to log on. The expression in the policy dialog box appear as follows:

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

231

A preauthentication policy that checks a client device for one of three antivirus applications For more information about compound expressions, see Configuring Compound Client Security Expressions on page 245.

Binding Policies
After you create the preauthentication or client security session policy, bind the policy to the level to which it applies. Preauthentication policies can be bound to virtual servers or globally.
To bind a preauthentication policy

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click a preauthentication policy. Drag the policy to one of the following under Configured Policies / Resources: Under AAA Global > Pre-Authentication Policies Under Virtual Servers > Pre-Authentication Policies

232

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Setting the Priority of Policies

You can have multiple preauthentication policies that are bound to different levels. For example, you have a policy that checks for a specific antivirus application bound to AAA Global and a firewall policy bound to the virtual server. When users log on, the policy that is bound to the virtual server is applied first and then the policy bound at AAA Global. You can change the order that the preauthentication scans occur. To make the Access Gateway apply the global policy first, change the priority number of the policy bound to the virtual server so it is a higher number than the policy bound globally. For example, set the priority number for the global policy to one and the virtual server policy to two. When users log on, the global policy is applied first and then the virtual server policy.
To change the priority of a bound policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, expand either AAA Global or Virtual Servers. If you selected Virtual Servers, expand a virtual server node. Expand the Pre-Authentication Policies node and then click a policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify priority. In the Modify Priority dialog box, in Priority, type a number and click OK.

Unbinding and Removing Preauthentication Polices

If a preauthentication policy is no longer needed on the Access Gateway, you can remove it. Before removing a preauthentication policy, unbind it from the virtual server or globally.
To unbind a preauthentication policy

1.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Configured Policies / Resources, click the AAA Global or Virtual Server node to which the policy is bound. Select the policy, under Related Tasks, click Unbind pre-authentication policy.

2.

When the preauthentication policy is unbound, the policy can be removed from the Access Gateway.

Chapter 12 To remove a preauthentication policy

Configuring Endpoint Polices

233

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Pre-Authentication Policies and then select the policy. Under Related Policies, click Remove pre-authentication policy.

Configuring Post-Authentication Policies

A post-authentication policy is a set of generic rules that the client device must meet to keep the session active. If the policy fails, the connection to the Access Gateway is closed. You can configure any setting for client connections that can be made conditional in the post-authentication policy. Post-authentication policies are configured using session policies. First, create the users to which the policy applies. Then, add the users to a group and bind session, traffic policies, and intranet applications to the group. You can specify groups to be authorization groups. This type of group allows you to assign users to groups on the basis of a client security expression within the session policy. A post-authentication policy can also be configured to put users in a quarantine group if the client device does not meet the requirements of the policy. Post-authentication policies are also used with SmartAccess. For more information about SmartAccess, see How SmartAccess Works on page 190. If users fail a post-authentication policy, they can be put into a quarantine group. When users are in the quarantine group, logon to the Access Gateway is permitted, however users receive limited access to network resources.

Configuring a Post-Authentication Policy

The post-authentication policy is configured using a session policy. A simple policy includes a client security expression and a client security message.
To configure a post-authentication policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Request Profile, click New. In Name, type a name for the profile. On the Security tab, click Advanced.

234

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Under Client Security, click Override Global and click New. Configure the client security expression and click Create. Under Client Security, in Quarantine Group, click Override Global, and in Quarantine Group, select a group. In Error Message, type the message you want users to receive if the postauthentication scan fails. Under Authorization Groups, click Override Global, select a group, click Add, click OK, and click Create. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

Configuring the Frequency to Run a PostAuthentication Policy

You can configure the Access Gateway to run the post-authentication policy at specified intervals. For example, you configured a client security policy and want it to run on the client device every 10 minutes. You can do this by creating a custom expression within the policy. When you configure the client security policy using the procedure To configure a post-authentication policy you can set the frequency at that time.

Dialog box for configuring the frequency of post-authentication scans

Configuring Quarantine and Authorization Groups

When users log on to the Access Gateway, users can be assigned to a group that is configured either on the Access Gateway or on an authentication server in the secure network. If a user fails a post-authentication scan, the user can be placed in a restricted group, called a quarantine group, which restricts access to network resources.

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

235

You can also use authorization groups to restrict user access to network resources. For example, you might have a group of contract personnel that has access only to your email server and a file share. When client devices pass the security requirements defined on the Access Gateway, users can be added to groups dynamically. Quarantine and authorization groups are configured using either global settings or session policies that are bound to a user, group, or virtual server. You can assign users to groups on the basis of a client security expression within the session policy. When the user is a member of a group, the session policy is applied based on group membership.

Configuring Quarantine Groups

When configuring a quarantine group, configure the client security expression using the Security Settings - Advanced dialog box within a session profile.
To configure a quarantine group using a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Request Profile, click New. On the Security tab, click Advanced. Under Client Security, click Override Global and click New. In the Client Expression dialog box, configure the client security expression and click Create. In Quarantine Group, select the group. In Error Message, type a message that describes the problem for users and click Create. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create, and click Close.

After the session policy is created, bind it to a user, group, or virtual server. Note: If the endpoint analysis scan fails and the user is put in the quarantine group, the policies that are bound to the quarantine group are effective only if there are no policies bound directly to the user that has an equal or lower priority number than the policies bound to the quarantine group.

236

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To configure a global quarantine group

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

To configure a global quarantine group, in the configuration utility in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. In the details pane, under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Security tab, click Advanced. Under Client Security, click New. In the Client Expression dialog box, configure the client security expression and click Create. In Quarantine Group, select the group. In Error Message, type a message that describes the problem for users and click OK twice.

Configuring Authorization Groups

When users pass the endpoint analysis scan, you can add them to an authorization group. Membership in an authorization group is similar to a quarantine group in that the settings users receive are based on endpoint security instead of group extraction. The authorization group is configured either globally or using a session policy.
To configure an authorization group using a session policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Request Profile, click New. On the Security tab, click Advanced. Under Authorization Groups, click Override Global, select a group from the drop-down list, click Add, click OK and click Create. In the Create Session Policy dialog box, next to Named Expressions, select General, select True value, click Add Expression, click Create and click Close.

After the session policy is created, you can bind it to a user, group, or virtual server.

Chapter 12 To configure a global authorization group

Configuring Endpoint Polices

237

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Access Gateway and click Global Settings. Under Settings, click Change global settings. On the Security tab, click Advanced. Under Authorization Groups, select a group from the drop-down list, click Add, and click OK twice.

If you want to remove an authorization group either globally or from the session policy, in the Security Settings - Advanced dialog box, select the authorization group from the list and click Remove.

Configuring Client Security Preauthentication Expressions

The Access Gateway provides various endpoint security checks during user logon or at other configured times during a session that helps in improving security. These endpoint software checks include antivirus, personal firewall, antispam, Internet security, processes, services, files, and registry entries. Only those client devices that pass these security checks are allowed to establish an Access Gateway session. The following are the types of client side security checks that are possible on the Access Gateway: Antivirus Personal firewall Internet security Antispam Service policies Process policies Operating system File policies Registry policies

238

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If a security check fails on the client device, no new connections are made until a subsequent check passes (in the case of checks that are at regular intervals); however, traffic flowing through existing connections continues to be tunneled through the Access Gateway. You can use the Access Gateway Policy Manager to configure session policies to check for client security.

Configuring Antivirus, Firewall, Internet Security or Antispam Expressions

The settings for antivirus, firewall, Internet security, and antispam policies are configured within the Add Expression dialog box. The settings for each are the same: the differences are the values that you select. For example, you want to check the client device for Norton AntiVirus Version 10 and ZoneAlarm Pro. You create two expressions with the name and version number of each application. When you select client security as the expression type, you can configure the following: Component that is the type of client security, such as antivirus, firewall, or registry entry. Name is the name of the application, process, file, registry entry, or operating system. Qualifier is the version or the value of component for which the expression checks. Operator checks is the value exists or is equal to the value. Value is the application version for antivirus, firewall, Internet security, or antispam software on the client device. Frequency is how often a post-authentication is run, in minutes. Error weight assigns a weight to each error message contained in a nested expression when multiple expressions have different error strings. The weight determines which error message appears. Freshness defines how old a virus definition can be. For example, you can configure the expression so virus definitions are no older than three days.

The following illustration shows the fields for configuring a client security expression within the Add Expression dialog box:

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

239

Add expression dialog box

To configure a client security expression

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click Session Policies or Pre-Authentication Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new session policy or Create new preauthentication policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. Next to Match Any Expression, click Add. In Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the settings for the following: A. B. C. D. E. In Component, select the item for which to scan. In Name, type the name of the application. In Qualifier, select Version. In Operator, select the value. In Value, type the client security string, click OK, and click Close.

Configuring Service Policies for Security

A service is a program the runs silently on a client device. You can create an expression so that client devices are running the service when the session is established.
To configure a service expression

1. 2.

In the Add Expression dialog box, in Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the settings for the following: A. In Component, select Service.

240

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

B. C. D.

In Name, type the name of the service. In Qualifier, leave blank or select Version. Depending on your selection in Qualifier, do one of the following: If left blank, in Operator, select EXISTS or NOTEXISTS If you selected Version, in Operator, select the value, click OK, and click Close

The list of all available services and their status can be checked on a Windows computer at the following location: Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services Note: The service name for each service varies from its listed name. Check for the name of the service by looking at the Properties dialog box.

Configuring Process Policies for Security

You can define a rule for all user devices to have a particular process running to logon to the Access Gateway. The process can be any application including customized applications. Note: The list of all processes running on a Windows computer appears on the Processes tab of Windows Task Manager.

To configure a process expression

1. 2.

In the Add Expression dialog box, in Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the settings for the following: A. B. C. In Component, select Process. In Name, type the name of the application. In Operator, select EXISTS or NOTEXISTS, click OK, and click Close.

When you configure an endpoint analysis policy (pre-authentication or postauthentication) to check for a process, you can configure an MD5 checksum. When you create the expression for the policy, you can add the MD5 checksum to the process you are checking for. For example, if you are checking to see if [Link] is running on the client device, the expression is:

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

241

[Link](notepad.exe_md5_388b8fbc36a8558587afc90f b23a3b00) EXISTS

Configuring Operating System Policies

You can configure client security strings to determine whether or not the client is logging on from a particular operating system. You can also configure the expression to check for a particular service pack or hotfix. The values for Windows are: Windows Vista - vista Windows XP - winxp Windows 2003 - win2003 Windows 2000 - win2000
To configure an operating system expression

1. 2.

In the Add Expression dialog box, in Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the settings for the following: A. B. C. In Component, select Operating System. In Name, type the name of the application. In Qualifier, do one of the following: D. Leave blank Select Service Pack Select Hotfix

Depending on your selection in Step C, in Operator, do one of the following: If Qualifier is blank, in Operator, select EXISTS or NOTEXISTS If you selected Service Pack or Hotfix, select the operator and in Value, type the value

3.

Click OK and click Close.

The string [Link] (winxp).sp without a number returns an error message because this is an invalid check

242

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

For example, if the operating system has service packs present, such as Service Pack 3 and Service Pack 4, you can configure a check just for Service Pack 4, because Service Pack 4s presence automatically indicates that previous service packs are present.

Configuring File Policies

You can define a rule that checks if a file exists or does not exist to establish the session. You can also specify the time stamp to define the age of the file. If the file does exist, the client device fails the scan.
To configure a file security expression

1. 2.

In the Add Expression dialog box, in Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the settings for the following: A. B. C. In Component, select File. In Name, type the name of the application. In Qualifier, leave blank or select Time Stamp. If Time Stamp is selected, in Value, type the value. D. In Operator, select the value, click OK, and click Close.

Note: If you use the command line to configure a file check, use four backslash (\) characters instead of one. For example, the configuration shows c:\\\\[Link] and not c:\[Link]. You can also use a forward slash to configure a file check, such as c:/[Link]

Configuring Registry Policies

You can check for the existence and value of registry entries on the client device so the session can be established only if the particular entry exists or has the configured value or above. When configuring a registry expression using the Access Gateway Policy Manager, use the following guidelines: Two backslashes are used to separate keys and subkeys, such as
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE

Underscores are used to separate the subkey and the associated value name, such as
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\VirusSoftware_Version

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

243

A single quote is used to denote a space, such as

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Citrix\\Secure\Access\ Client_ProductVersion

The following illustration shows a registry expression:

A registry expression that looks for the Access Gateway Plug-in registry key when users log on Note: If you are scanning for registry keys and values and select Advanced Free-Form in the Expression dialog box, the expression must start with [Link]. Registry checks are supported under the most common five types: HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT HKEY_CURRENT_USER HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HKEY_USERS HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG

Registry values to be checked use types: String For the string value type, case-sensitivity is checked

244

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

DWORD For DWORD type, the value is compared and must be equal

Expanded String Other types such as Binary and Multi-String, are not supported

Only the '==' comparison operator is supported Other comparison operators such as <, > and case-sensitive comparisons are not supported The total registry string length should be less than 256 bytes

You can add a value to the expression. The value can be a software version, service pack version, or any other value that appears in the registry. If the data value in the registry does not match the value you are testing against, users are denied logon. Note: You cannot scan for a value within a subkey. The scan must match the named value and the associated data value.

To configure a registry expression

1. 2.

In the Add Expression dialog box, in Expression Type, select Client Security. Configure the settings for the following: A. B. C. D. In Component, select Registry. In Name, type the name of the registry key. In Qualifier, leave blank or select Value. In Operator, do one of the following: E. If Qualifier is left blank, select EXISTS or NOTEXISTS If you selected Value in Qualifier, select either == or !==

In Value, type the value as it appears in the registry editor, click OK, and click Close.

If an entry in the registry has two words, such as Norton AntiVirus, use one backslash to denote the space. The backslash does not replace the space, as shown in the following example:
[Link](HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\Symantec\\Norton\ AntiVirus_Version).VALUE == [Link] -frequency 5

Chapter 12

Configuring Endpoint Polices

245

Configuring Compound Client Security Expressions

The client security strings mentioned above can be combined to form different compound client security expressions. The Boolean operators that are supported in the Access Gateway are: And (&&) Or (||) Not (!)

The strings can be grouped together using parentheses for greater precision. Note: If you are using the command line to configure expressions, use parentheses to group security expressions together when you form a compound expression. It improves understanding and debugging of the client expression.

Configuring Policies with the AND (&&) Operator

The AND operator works by combining two client security strings so that the compound check passes only when both checks are true. The expression is evaluated from left to right and if the first check fails, the second check is not carried out. The AND operator can be configured using the keyword AND or the symbols &&. Example: The following is a client security check that determines if the client device has Version 7.0 of Sophos AntiVirus installed and running. It also checks if the netlogon service is running on the same computer.
[Link](sophos).version==7.0 AND [Link](netlogon) EXISTS

This string can also be configured as

[Link](sophos).version==7.0 && [Link](netlogon) EXISTS

Configuring Policies with the OR ( || ) Operator

The OR operator works by combining two security strings such that the compound check passes when either check is true. The expression is evaluated from left to right and if the first check passes, the second check is not carried out. If the first check does not pass, the second check is carried out. The OR operator can be configured using the keyword OR or the symbols '||'.

246

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Example: The following is a client security check that determines if the client computer has either the file c:\[Link] on it or the [Link] process running on it. [Link](c:\\\\[Link]) EXISTS) OR ([Link]([Link]) EXISTS This string can also be configured as [Link](c:\\\\[Link]) EXISTS) || ([Link]([Link]) EXISTS

Configuring Policies Using the NOT ( ! ) Operator

The NOT ! or the negation operator negates the client security string. Example: The following client security check passes if the file c:\sophos_virus_defs.dat file is NOT more than two days old: !([Link](c:\\\\sophos_virus_defs.dat).timestamp==2dy)

C HAPTER 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

After the Access Gateway is configured, you can maintain and monitor the Access Gateway. In This Chapter Upgrading the Access Gateway Configuring Delegated Administrators Viewing Access Gateway Configuration Settings Clearing the Access Gateway Configuration Configuring Auditing on the Access Gateway

Upgrading the Access Gateway

The software that resides on the Access Gateway can be upgraded when new releases are made available. You can check for updates on the Citrix Web site at My Citrix. You can upgrade to a new release only if your Access Gateway licenses are under the Subscription Advantage program when the update is released. Subscription Advantage can be renewed at any time. For more information, see the Citrix Support Web site at [Link]
To check for software updates

1. 2. 3. 4.

Go to the Citrix Web site at [Link] click My Citrix, and log on. At the top of the Web page, click Downloads and in Search Downloads by Product, select Citrix Access Gateway. In Select Product Version, select the Access Gateway version to start the download. Follow the instructions on the screen.

When the software is downloaded to your computer, you can install the software using the Upgrade Wizard in the configuration utility or a command prompt.

248

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide To upgrade the Access Gateway using the Upgrade Wizard

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click System. In the details pane, click Upgrade Wizard. Click Next and follow the directions in the wizard.

To upgrade the Access Gateway using a command prompt

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

To upload the software to the Access Gateway, use a secure FTP client, such as WinSCP, to connect to the appliance. Copy the software from your computer to the /var/nsinstall directory on the appliance. Use an SSH client, such as PuTTY, to open an SSH connection to the appliance. Log on to the Access Gateway. At a command prompt, type
shell

To change to the nsinstall directory at a command prompt, type:

cd /var/nsinstall

To view the contents of the directory, type

ls

To unpack the software, type

tar xvzf build_X_XX.tgz

where build_X_XX.tgz is the name of the build to which you want to upgrade. 9. 10. To start the installation, at a command prompt, type
./installns

When the installation is complete, restart the Access Gateway.

When the Access Gateway restarts, to verify successful installation, at a command prompt type
what or show version

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

249

Configuring Delegated Administrators

The Access Gateway has a default administrator user name and password. The default user name and password is nsroot. When you run the Setup Wizard for the first time, you change the administrator password. You can create additional administrator accounts and assign each account with different levels of access to the Access Gateway. For example, you have one person who is assigned to monitor Access Gateway connections and logs and another person who is responsible for configuring specific settings on the Access Gateway. The first administrator has read-only access and the second administrator has limited access to the appliance. A delegated administrator is configured using command policies and system users and groups. Command policies are rules that control what individual users can access and do on the Access Gateway. Command policies allow you to define what parts of the Access Gateway configuration a user or group is allowed to access and modify. You can also regulate which commands, command groups, virtual servers, and other elements administrators and groups are permitted to configure. The Access Gateway has a default deny system command policy. Command policies cannot be bound globally. The policies must be bound directly to system administrators (users) or groups. If users and groups do not have an associated command policy, the default deny policy is applied and users cannot execute any commands or configure the Access Gateway. All administrators inherit the policies of the groups to which they belong. When configuring delegated administration, assign priorities to the administrator or group so the Access Gateway can determine which policy takes precedence. When you are configuring a delegated administrator, the configuration process is: Add a system user Add a system group Create a command policy Bind the command policy to the user or group by setting the priority

Configuring Command Policies

There are four built-in command policies that you can use for delegated administration: Read-only. Allows read-only access to show all commands except for the system command group and [Link] show commands.

250

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Operator. Allows read-only access and also allows access to enable and disable commands on services. This policy also allows access to set services and servers as accessdown. Network. Permits almost complete system access, excluding system commands and the shell command. Superuser. Grants full system privileges, such as those granted to the default administrator, nsroot.

Command policies contain built-in expressions. The configuration utility is used to create system users, system groups, command policies, and define permissions.
To create an administrative user on the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Users. In the details pane, click Add. In User Name, type a user name. In Password and Confirm Password, type the password. Under Member of, in Available Groups, select a group and click Add. Under Command Policies, select a policy, in Priority type a number, click Create and click Close.

When you are configuring an administrative user on the appliance, you can add the user to a group. You can create a new group from within the Create User dialog box or using the configuration utility.
To create an administrative group from within the Create User dialog box

1. 2.

In the Create User dialog box, under Member of, click New. In Group Name, type a name for the group, select a user, and click Create.

To configure an administrative group using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Groups. In the details pane, click Add. In Group Name, type a name for the group. To add an existing user to the group, under Members > Available Users, select a user and click Add Under Command Policies, select a policy, click Create and click Close.

When creating a new administrative group, you can also create a new user.

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

251

To configure an administrative user from within the Create Group dialog box

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Configure Group dialog box, under Member, click New. In User Name type a user name. In Password and Confirm Password, type the password. Under Command Policies, select a policy and click Create. The new user appears under Configured Users in the Configure Group dialog box.

Configuring Custom Command Policies

Custom command policies can be used to define a greater level of detail for user rights assignments. For example, you can give one person the ability to add session policies to the Access Gateway and not allow the user to perform any other configuration. When configuring a custom command policy, you provide a policy name and then configure the policy components to create the command specification. With the command specification, you can limit the commands administrators are allowed to use. For example, you want to deny administrators the ability to use the remove command. When configuring the policy, set the action to deny and then configure the parameters.
To create a custom command policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Command Policies. In the details pane, click Add. In Policy Name, type a name for the policy. In Action, select Allow or Deny. In Policy Components, select the following: Operator which is the action the administrator is allowed to perform Entity Group is the group to which the command belongs, such a authentication or high availability Entity is the entity an administrator can change, such as a RADIUS authentication policy Value which is the priority of the policy

6.

Click Add, click Create, and click Close.

252

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

When you click Add, the expression appears under Command Spec in the Create Command Policy dialog box. After creating the custom command policy, you can bind it to a user or a group.
To bind a custom command policy to a user or group

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Users or click Groups. In the details pane, select a user or group from the list and click Open. Under Command Policies, select the policy and click OK.

Viewing Access Gateway Configuration Settings

When you make changes to the Access Gateway, the changes are saved in log files for the configuration settings. You can view several types of configuration settings: Saved configuration, which is where you have saved your settings on the Access Gateway Running configuration, which is where you configured settings, such as a virtual server or authentication policy, and have not saved the configuration to the Access Gateway Running versus saved configuration where you can compare side-by-side the running and saved configuration on the Access Gateway

In addition to viewing configuration settings, you can configure settings using a batch file. The batch file contains a list of configuration commands that you can use to configure the Access Gateway. The batch file can reside on the Access Gateway or a computer in your network. You can type the commands in the Batch Configuration dialog box. You can also clear configuration settings on the Access Gateway. Important: If you choose to clear settings on the Access Gateway, certificates, virtual servers, and policies are removed. Citrix recommends that you do not clear the configuration.

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

253

Saving the Configuration to Your Computer

When you configure settings on the Access Gateway, you can save the settings to a file on your computer. If you need to reinstall the Access Gateway software or accidentally remove some settings, you can use this file to restore your configuration. Citrix recommends saving the file using the filename [Link]. If you need to restore the settings, you can copy the file to the Access Gateway and restart the appliance using the command-line interface or a program such as WinSCP to copy the file to the Access Gateway When you save the configuration, it is also saved on the Access Gateway in the [Link] file. You can save the configuration using the configuration utility.
To save the configuration

In the configuration utility, above the details pane, click Save and click Yes.

Viewing the Saved Configuration

The saved configuration are the settings that are saved on the Access Gateway. This includes settings for virtual servers, policies, IP addresses, users, groups, and certificates. The saved configuration is in a log file that you can access using the configuration utility.
To view the saved configuration

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Diagnostics. In the details pane, under View Configuration, click Saved configuration.

You can also save the configuration to a file on a computer on your network.
To save the Access Gateway configuration to a file on your computer

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Diagnostics. In the details pane, under View Configuration, click Saved configuration. In the Saved Configuration dialog box, click Save output text to a file and click Save.

254

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Viewing the Current Running Configuration

Any changes to the Access Gateway without saving them is called the running configuration. These settings are active on the Access Gateway, but are not saved on the appliance. If you configured additional settings, such as a policy, virtual server, users, or groups, you can view these settings in the running configuration.
To view the running configuration

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Diagnostics. In the details pane, under View Configuration, click Running configuration.

Comparing the Saved and Running Configuration

You can see which settings are saved on the appliance and compare those settings against the running configuration. You can choose to save the running configuration or make changes to the configuration.
To compare the saved and running configuration

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Diagnostics. In the details pane, under View Configuration, click Saved v/s running configuration.

Clearing the Access Gateway Configuration

You can clear the configuration settings on the Access Gateway. You can chose three levels of settings e to clear: Important: Citrix recommends saving your configuration before clearing the configuration on the Access Gateway. Basic. Clears all settings on the appliance except for the system IP address, default gateway, mapped IP addresses, subnet IP addresses, DNS settings, network settings, high availability settings, the administrative password and feature and mode settings. Extended. Clears all settings except for the system IP address, mapped IP addresses, subnet IP addresses, DNS settings, and high availability definitions.

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

255

All. Restores the configuration to the original factory settings including the system IP address and default route, which are required to maintain network connectivity to the appliance.

When you clear all or part of the configuration, the feature settings are set to the factory default settings. When you clear the configuration, files that are stored on the Access Gateway, such as certificates and licenses, are not removed. The file [Link] is not altered. If you want to save the configuration before clearing the configuration, save the configuration to your computer first. If you save the configuration, you can restore the [Link] file on the Access Gateway. When the file is restored to the appliance and the Access Gateway is restarted, any configuration settings in [Link] are restored. If you clear the entire configuration, high availability synchronization might not correspond to any of the clear configuration levels. Modifications to configuration files, such as [Link], are not reverted. Changes using the command nsapimgr do not revert to the original settings. If you have a high availability pair, both Access Gateway appliances are modified identically. For example, if you clear the basic configuration on one appliance, the changes are propagated to the second appliance.
To clear the Access Gateway configuration

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand System and click Diagnostics. In the details pane, under Maintenance, click Clear configuration. In Configuration Level, select the level you want to clear and click Run.

Managing User Sessions

You can manage user sessions in the configuration utility with the Active Access Gateway Users and Connections dialog box. This dialog box displays a list of active user sessions on the Access Gateway. You can end user or group sessions in this dialog box using the user name, group name, or IP address. You can also view active sessions within this dialog box. Session information includes: User name IP address of the client device Port number of the client device

256

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

IP address of the virtual server Port number of the virtual server Intranet IP address assigned to the user

To view user sessions

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Monitor Connections, click Active user sessions. View the list of sessions under Active connections between the client and Appliance.

You can retrieve updated information about sessions to the Access Gateway.
To refresh the session list

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Active User Sessions, click Active User Sessions. Click Refresh.

You can terminate user and group sessions. You can also end a session that has a specific intranet IP address and subnet mask.
To end user or group sessions

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Active User Sessions, click Active User Sessions. Do one of the following: To terminate a user session, click Active Users, select a user, and click Terminate To terminate a group session, click Active Groups, select a group, and click Terminate

To end a session using an intranet IP address

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, click Access Gateway. In the details pane, under Active User Sessions, click Active User Sessions. Next to Intranet IP, type the IP address.

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

257

4.

In Netmask, type the subnet mask and click Terminate.

Configuring Auditing on the Access Gateway

The Access Gateway allows logging of all the states and status information collected, so you can see the event history in chronological order. The messages contain information about the event that generated the message, a time stamp, the message type, and predefined log levels and message information. The Access Gateway also provides control over the information that is logged and the location where these messages are stored. The Access Gateway currently supports two log formats: a proprietary log format for local logs, and the syslog format for use with syslog servers. You can configure the Access Gateway logs to provide any of the following information:
Level EMERGENCY Description Only major errors in the Access Gateway are logged. Entries in the log indicate that the Access Gateway is experiencing a critical problem that is causing it to be unusable. Logs problems that might cause the Access Gateway to function incorrectly, but are not critical to its operation. Corrective action should be taken as soon as possible to prevent the Access Gateway from experiencing a critical problem. Logs critical conditions that do not restrict the Access Gateways operation, but that might escalate to a larger problem. Displays messages that result from some failed operation on the Access Gateway. Displays potential issues that could result in an error or a critical error. Displays more in-depth issues than the information level log, but serves the same purpose as notification.

ALERT

CRITICAL ERROR WARNING NOTICE

Compression statistics for the Access Gateway are also stored in the Access Gateway audit log if the TCP compression feature is configured. The compression ratio achieved for different data is stored in the log file for each user session on the Access Gateway in the log file. With the release of Version 9.1, the log signature Context is replaced with a SessionID. This allows you to track logs per session rather than per user. Logs that are generated as part of a session have the same SessionID. If a user establishes two sessions from the same client device with the same IP address, each session has a unique SessionID.

258

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Important: If you have written custom log parsing scripts, you need to make this signature change within the custom parsing scripts.

Configuring Logs on the Access Gateway

When you configure logging on the Access Gateway, you can choose to store the logs on the Access Gateway or send them to a syslog server. Logs are configured using the Access Gateway Policy Manager.
To configure an Access Gateway log

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies/ Resources, click Auditing Policies. Under Related Tasks, click Create new auditing policy. In Name, type a name for the policy. In Auditing Type, select one of the following: Syslog if you want to send the logs to a Syslog server. - or Nslog to store the logs on the Access Gateway.

5. 6.

Next to Server, click New. Type the following information for the server information where the logs are stored: A. B. C. D. In Name, type the name of the server. Under Server, type the IP Address and Port. Under Log Levels, select the level of logging. Next to Select date format, select how you want the date on the log to appear, click Create, and click Close.

After you create the auditing policy, you can bind to one, some, or all of the following: System global Access Gateway global Virtual servers Groups Users

Chapter 13 To bind an auditing policy

Maintaining the Access Gateway

259

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies / Resources, click an auditing policy and drag it to the Auditing Policies node under any of the following: System Global Access Gateway Global Virtual Servers Groups Users

You can modify an existing policy to alter the logging options.

To modify an audit policy

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies/ Resources, click Auditing Policies. Click the audit policy. Under Related Tasks, click Modify auditing policy. In the Configure Auditing Policy dialog box, click Modify. Select the changes and click OK twice.

You can remove an auditing policy from the Access Gateway. When you remove an auditing policy, it is unbound automatically.
To remove an auditing policy

1. 2.

In the Access Gateway Policy Manager, under Available Policies/ Resources, click Auditing Policies. Click the policy; under Related Tasks, click Remove auditing policy and click Yes.

Configuring ACL and TCP Logging

You can configure the Access Gateway to log details for packets that match an extended access control list (ACL). In addition to the ACL name, the logged details include packet-specific information such as the source and destination IP addresses. The information is stored either in a syslog or nslog file, depending on the type of logging (syslog or nslog) that is enabled.

260

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Logging can be enabled at both the global level and the ACL level. However, to enable logging at the ACL level, you must also enable it at the global level. The global setting takes precedence. For information on how to enable logging globally, see To configure an Access Gateway log on page 258. To optimize logging, when multiple packets from the same flow match an ACL, only the first packets details are logged, and the counter is incremented for every other packet that belongs to the same flow. A flow is defined as a set of packets that have the same values for the following parameters: Source IP Destination IP Source port Destination port Protocol

If the packet is not from the same flow, or if the time duration is beyond the mean time, a new flow is created. Mean time is the time during which packets of the same flow do not generate additional messages (although the counter is incremented). Note: Note: The total number of different flows that can be logged at any given time is limited to 10,000. The following table describes the parameters with which you can configure ACL logging at the rule level for extended ACLs.
Parameter Name Logstate Ratelimit Description State of the logging feature for the ACL. Possible values: ENABLED and DISABLED. Default: DISABLED. Number of log messages that a specific ACL can generate. Default:100.

The following procedure configures logging for an ACL and specifies the number of log messages that the rule can generate.
To configure ACL Logging using the configuration utility

1. 2.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Network and click ACLs. In the details pane, click Extended ACLs, and then select the ACL for which you want to configure logging and click Open.

Chapter 13

Maintaining the Access Gateway

261

3. 4.

In the Modify ACL dialog box, select the Log State check box. In the Log Rate Limit text box, type the rate limit that you want to specify for the rule and click OK.

After you configure ACL logging, you can enable it on the Access Gateway. Create an auditing policy and then bind it to a user, group, virtual server, or globally. To create an auditing policy, see To configure an Access Gateway log on page 258.
To enable ACL or TCP logging on the Access Gateway

In the Create Auditing Server or Configure Auditing Server dialog box, click ACL Logging or TCP Logging.

262

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

A PPENDIX

Configuring Security Settings

This chapter provides conceptual information about the security technologies used in the Access Gateway solution, helps you identify the number and type of certificates required, and helps you decide how and where to obtain and install them. In This Appendix Securing Connections with Digital Certificates Configuring FIPS 140-2 on the Model 9000 FIPS Series

Important: When configuring certificates, do not use 512-bit keypairs. They are subject to brute force attacks.

Securing Connections with Digital Certificates

This section introduces the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols, and provides an overview of cryptography and Public Key Infrastructure (PKI).

Introduction to Security Protocols

SSL and TLS are the leading Internet protocols providing security for e-commerce, Web services, and many other network functions. The SSL protocol is todays standard for securely exchanging information on the Internet. Originally developed by Netscape, the SSL protocol became crucial to the operation of the Internet. As a result, the Internet Engineering Taskforce (IETF) took over responsibility for the development of SSL as an open standard. To clearly distinguish SSL from other ongoing work, the IETF renamed SSL as TLS. The TLS protocol is the descendant of the third version of SSL; TLS 1.0 is identical to SSL 3.1.

264

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Some organizations, including United States government organizations, require the use of TLS to secure data communications. These organizations may also require the use of validated cryptography. FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) 140 is a standard for cryptography. The SSL/TLS protocol allows sensitive data to be transmitted over public networks such as the Internet by providing the following important security features: Authentication. A client can determine a servers identity and ascertain that the server is not an impostor. Optionally, a server can also authenticate the identity of the client requesting connections. Privacy. Data passed between the client and server is encrypted so that if a third party intercepts messages, it cannot unscramble the data. Data integrity. The recipient of encrypted data knows if a third party corrupts or modifies that data.

Introduction to Cryptography
The SSL/TLS protocol uses cryptography to secure communications. Cryptography provides the ability to encode messages to ensure confidentiality. Cryptography is also used to authenticate the identity of a message source and to ensure the integrity of its contents. A message is sent using a secret code called a cipher. The cipher scrambles the message so that it cannot be understood by anyone other than the sender and receiver. Only the receiver who has the secret code can decipher the original message, thus ensuring confidentiality. Cryptography allows the sender to include special information in the message that only the sender and receiver know. The receiver can authenticate the message by reviewing the special information. Cryptography also ensures that the contents of a message are not altered. To do this, the sender includes a cryptographic operation called a hash function in the message. A hash function is a mathematical representation of the information, similar to the checksums found in communication protocols. When the data arrives at its destination, the receiver calculates the hash function. If the receivers hash function value is the same as the senders, the integrity of the message is assured.

Types of Cryptography
There are two main types of cryptography: Secret key cryptography Public key cryptography

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

265

In cryptographic systems, the term key refers to a numerical value used by an algorithm to alter information, making that information secure and visible only to individuals who have the corresponding key to recover the information. Secret key cryptography is also known as symmetric key cryptography. With this type of cryptography, both the sender and the receiver know the same secret code, called the key. Messages are encrypted by the sender using the key and decrypted by the receiver using the same key. This method works well if you are communicating with only a limited number of people, but it becomes impractical to exchange secret keys with large numbers of people. In addition, there is also the problem of how you communicate the secret key securely. Public key cryptography, also called asymmetric encryption, uses a pair of keys for encryption and decryption. With public key cryptography, keys work in pairs of matched public and private keys. The public key can be freely distributed without compromising the private key, which must be kept secret by its owner. Because these keys work only as a pair, encryption initiated with the public key can be decrypted only with the corresponding private key. The following example illustrates how public key cryptography works: Ann wants to communicate secretly with Bill. Ann encrypts her message using Bills public key (which Bill made available to everyone) and Ann sends the scrambled message to Bill. When Bill receives the message, he uses his private key to unscramble the message so that he can read it. When Bill sends a reply to Ann, he scrambles the message using Anns public key. When Ann receives Bills reply, she uses her private key to unscramble his message.

The major advantage asymmetric encryption offers over symmetric key cryptography is that senders and receivers do not have to communicate keys up front. Provided the private key is kept secret, confidential communication is possible using the public keys. Combining public key and secret key cryptography. The main disadvantage of public key cryptography is that the process of encrypting a message, using the very large keys common to PKI, can cause performance problems on all but the most powerful computer systems. For this reason, public key and secret key cryptography are often combined. The following example illustrates how this works:

266

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Bill wants to communicate secretly with Ann, so he obtains Anns public key. He also generates random numbers to use just for this session, known as a session key. Bill uses Anns public key to scramble the session key. Bill sends the scrambled message and the scrambled session key to Ann. Ann uses her private key to unscramble Bills message and extract the session key.

When Bill and Ann successfully exchange the session key, they no longer need public key cryptographycommunication can take place using just the session key. For example, public key encryption is used to send the secret key; when the secret key is exchanged, communication takes place using secret key encryption. This solution offers the advantages of both methodsit provides the speed of secret key encryption and the security of public key encryption.

Digital Certificates and Certificate Authorities

In the above scenarios, how can Ann be sure that Bill is who he says he is and not an impostor? When Ann distributes her public key, Bill needs some assurance that Ann is who she says she is. The ISO X.509 protocol defines a mechanism called a certificate that contains a users public key that is signed by a trusted entity called a Certificate Authority (CA). Certificates contain information used to establish identities over a network in a process called authentication. Like a drivers licence, a passport, or other forms of personal identification, certificates enable servers and clients to authenticate each other before establishing a secure connection. Certificates are valid only for a specified time period; when a certificate expires, a new one must be issued. The issuing authority can also revoke certificates. To establish an SSL/TLS connection, you require a server certificate at one end of the connection and a root certificate of the CA that issued the server certificate at the other end. Server certificate. A server certificate certifies the identity of a server. The type of digital certificate that is required by the Access Gateway is called a server certificate. Root certificate. A root certificate identifies the CA that signed the server certificate. The root certificate belongs to the CA. This type of digital certificate is required by a client device to verify the server certificate.

When establishing an SSL connection with a Web browser on a client device, the server sends its certificate to the client.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

267

When receiving a server certificate, the Web browser (for example, Internet Explorer) on the client device checks to see which CA issued the certificate and if the CA is trusted by the client. If the CA is not trusted, the Web browser prompts the user to accept or decline the certificate (effectively accepting or declining the ability to access this site). Now when Ann receives a message from Bill, the locally stored information about the CA that issued the certificate is used to verify that it did indeed issue the certificate. This information is a copy of the CAs own certificate and is referred to as a root certificate. Certificates generally have a common format, usually based on ITU standards. The certificate contains information that includes the: Issuer. The organization that issues the certificates. Subject. The party that is identified by the certificate. Period of validity. The certificates start date and expiration date. Public key. The subjects public key used to encrypt data. Issuers signature. The CAs digital signature on the certificate used to guarantee its authenticity.

A number of companies and organizations currently act as CAs, including VeriSign, Baltimore, Entrust, and their respective affiliates.

Certificate Chains
Some organizations delegate the responsibility for issuing certificates to resolve the issue of geographical separation between organization units, or that of applying different issuing policies to different sections of the organization. Responsibility for issuing certificates can be delegated by setting up subordinate CAs. The X.509 standard includes a model for setting up a hierarchy of CAs. In this model, the root CA is at the top of the hierarchy and has a self-signed certificate. The CAs that are directly subordinate to the root CA have CA certificates signed by the root CA. CAs under the subordinate CAs in the hierarchy have their CA certificates signed by the subordinate CAs.

268

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

The hierarchical structure of a typical digital certificate chain. CAs can sign their own certificates (that is, they are self-signed) or they can be signed by another CA. If the certificate is self-signed, it is called root CAs. If it is not self-signed, it is called subordinate or intermediate CAs. If a server certificate is signed by a CA with a self-signed certificate, the certificate chain is composed of exactly two certificates: the end entity certificate and the root CA. If a user or server certificate is signed by an intermediate CA, the certificate chain is longer. The following figure shows the first two elements are the end entity certificate (in this case, [Link]) and the certificate of the intermediate CA, in that order. The intermediate CAs certificate is followed by the certificate of its CA. This listing continues until the last certificate in the list is for a root CA. Each certificate in the chain attests to the identity of the previous certificate.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

269

A typical digital certificate chain.

Certificate Revocation Lists

From time to time, CAs issue certificate revocation lists (CRLs). CRLs contain information about certificates that can no longer be trusted. For example, suppose Ann leaves XYZ Corporation. The company can place Ann's certificate on a CRL to prevent her from signing messages with that key. Similarly, you can revoke a certificate if a private key is compromised or if that certificate expired and a new one is in use. Before you trust a public key, make sure that the certificate does not appear on a CRL.

Certificate Expiration and Renewal

Certificates are issued with a planned lifetime and explicit expiration date. After it is issued, a certificate is considered valid until its expiration date is reached. After the expiration date, the certificate cannot be used to validate a user session. This policy improves security by limiting the damage potential of a compromised certificate. These expiration dates are set by the CA that issued the certificate. Usually, you need to renew a certificate before it expires. Most CAs offer a well documented process for certificate renewal. Consult the Web site of your CA for detailed instructions about renewing certificates.

Getting Certificates
When you identify the number and type of certificates required for your Access Gateway deployment, you must decide where to obtain the certificates. Where you choose to obtain certificates depends on a number of factors, including: Whether or not your organization is a CA, which is likely to be the case only in very large corporations Whether or not your organization has already established a business relationship with a public CA The fact that the Windows operating system includes support for many public Certificate Authorities The cost of certificates, the reputation of a particular public CA, and so on

270

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

If Your Organization Is its Own Certificate Authority

If your organization is running its own CA, you must determine whether or not it is appropriate to use your companys certificates for the purpose of securing communications in your Access Gateway installation. Citrix recommends that you contact your internal security department to discuss this and to get further instructions about how to obtain certificates. If you are unsure if your organization is a CA, contact your internal security department or your organizations security expert.

If Your Organization Is not its Own Certificate Authority

If your organization is not running its own CA, you need to obtain your certificates from a public CA such as VeriSign. Obtaining a digital certificate from a public CA involves a verification process in which: Your organization provides corporate or organization information so the CA can verify that your organization is who it claims to be. The verification process may involve other departments in your organization, such as accounting, to provide letters of incorporation or similar legal documents. Individuals with the appropriate authority in your organization are required to sign legal agreements provided by the CA. The CA verifies your organization as a purchaser; therefore, your purchasing department is likely to be involved. You provide the CA with contact details of suitable individuals whom they can call if there are queries.

Getting Server Certificates

Your organizations security expert should have a procedure for obtaining server certificates. Instructions for generating server certificates using various Web server products are available from the Web sites of popular CAs such as Verisign and others. For more information about generating a certificate request, see Creating a Certificate Signing Request on page 82. Note: Several CAs offer Test Server Certificates for a limited trial period. It might be expedient to obtain a Test Certificate to test the Access Gateway before deploying it in a production environment. If you do this, be aware that you need to download matching Test Root Certificates that must be installed on each client device that connects through the Access Gateway.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

271

Digital Certificates and Access Gateway Operation

The Access Gateway uses digital certificates to encrypt and authenticate traffic over a connection. If the digital certificate installed on the Access Gateway is not signed by a Certificate Authority, the traffic is encrypted but not authenticated. A digital certificate must be signed by a Certificate Authority to also authenticate the traffic. When traffic over a connection is not authenticated, the connection can be compromised through a man in the middle attack. In such an attack, a third party intercepts the public key sent by the Access Gateway to Access Gateway Plug-in and uses it to impersonate the Access Gateway. As a result, the user unknowingly sends authentication credentials to the attacker, who could then connect to the Access Gateway. A certificate that is signed by a Certificate Authority works to prevent such attacks. If the certificate installed on the Access Gateway is not signed by a Certificate Authority, Access Gateway Plug-in users see a security alert when attempting to log on. Users that log on using the Access Gateway Plug-in see security warnings unless you install a certificate that is signed by a Certificate Authority on the Access Gateway and a corresponding certificate on users computers. Users can also disable the Security Alert through the Connection Properties dialog box.

Using Windows Certificates

The Access Gateway includes the Certificate Signing Request to create a certificate request automatically. After the file is returned from the Certificate Authority, it can be uploaded to the Access Gateway. When the file is uploaded, it is converted automatically to the correct format for use. If you do not want to use the Certificate Signing Request to create the signed certificate, Citrix recommends using Win32 OpenSSL to administer any certificate tasks. To find out more about Win32 OpenSSL, visit the OpenSSL Web site at [Link] Binaries for Win32 OpenSSL can be downloaded from [Link] If you are familiar with certificate manipulation, you can use other tools to create a PEM-formatted file. The certificate that you upload to the Access Gateway must have the following characteristics: It must be in PEM format and must include a private key. The signed certificate and private key must be unencrypted. An encrypted private key can be used if there is a password to decrypt it.

272

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Unencrypting the Private Key

Follow this procedure only if the method you use to generate the private key results in an encrypted key.
To unencrypt the private key

1.

At the $ prompt, enter the command: openssl rsa. If you enter this command without arguments, you are prompted as follows:
read RSA key

2.

Enter the name of the password to be encrypted. You can enter the openssl rsa command with arguments if you know the name of the private key and the unencrypted PEM file. For example, if the private key filename is my_keytag_key.pvk and the unencrypted filename is [Link], enter openssl rsa -in my_keytag_key.pvk -out [Link].

For more information, see the Open SSL Web site at [Link] docs/apps/[Link]#EXAMPLES. For information about downloading OpenSSL for Windows, see the SourceForge Web site at [Link] [Link]?group_id=23617&release_id=48801.

Converting to a PEM-Formatted Certificate

The signed certificate file that you receive from the Certificate Authority might not be in a PEM format. If the file is in binary format (DER), convert it to PEM format as follows: openssl x509 -in certFile -inform DER -outform PEM -out convertedCertFile If the certificate is already in a text format, it may be in PKCS format. You will receive a PKCS formatted certificate if you specified that the certificate will be used with a Microsoft rather than Apache operating system. The following command results in an error message if the certificate is not in PEM format. The certFile should not contain the private key when you run this command. openssl verify -verbose -CApath /tmp certFile If that command results in the following error message, the file is not in PEM format.
certFile: unable to load certificate file 4840:error:0906D064:PEM routines:PEM_read_bio:bad base64 decode:pem_lib.[Link]

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

273

To convert the certificate from PKCS7 to PEM format

1.

Run the command: openssl pkcs7 -in ./certFile -print_certs The output will look like this:
subject=... ... -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----... Server Certificate ... -----END CERTIFICATE----subject=... ... -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----... Intermediate Cert ... -----END CERTIFICATE-----

2.

Combine the server certificate data and the intermediate certificate data (if it exists) from the output with the private key.

Combining the Private Key with the Signed Certificate

You must combine the signed certificate with the private key before you can upload it to the Access Gateway.
To combine the private key with the signed certificate

1.

Use a text editor to combine the unencrypted private key with the signed certificate in the PEM file format. The file contents should look similar to the following:
-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY----<Unencrypted Private Key> -----END RSA Private KEY---------BEGIN CERTIFICATE----<Signed Certificate> -----END CERTIFICATE-----

2.

Save and name the PEM file; for example, [Link].

Generating Trusted Certificates for Multiple Levels

You must determine whether or not your certificate has more than one level and, if it does, handle the intermediate certificates properly.

274

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Caution: Any certificate for the Access Gateway that has more than one level must include all intermediate certificates or the system could become unusable.

To generate trusted root certificates for multiple levels

1.

Open Internet Explorer and access a Web page through the Access Gateway. For example, enter an address similar to the following: [Link] where: ipAddress is the IP address of your Access Gateway httpPort is the Access Gateway port number

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Double-click the Lock symbol in the bottom right corner of the browser. Switch to the Certificate Path window pane at the top of the screen. Double-click the first path level to bring up the certificate information for the first level and then go to the Details screen. Click the Copy to File button at the bottom. After the Certificate Export wizard appears, click Next. Click the format Base-64 encoded and then click Next. Enter a filename; for example, G:\tmp\[Link]. Review the information and note the complete filename. Click Finish. Click OK to close the Certificate Information window for the first level. Repeat Steps 49 for all levels except the last level. Insert all certificates in one file and make sure that any intermediate certificates are part of any certificate file you upload. The file to be uploaded should be in the following format:
private key Server Certificate Intermediate Certificate 0 Intermediate Certificate 1 Intermediate Certificate 2

Requiring Certificates for Internal Connections

To increase security for internal connections originating from the Access Gateway, you can require the Access Gateway to validate SSL server certificates. Validating SSL server certificates is an important security measure because it can help prevent security breaches, such as man-in-the-middle attacks.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

275

Requiring validation of the SSL server certificates increases security for the connections between the Access Gateway and the secure network. These connections are security-sensitive because they are used to configure the Access Gateway and grant or deny access to network resources using session policies. The Access Gateway requires installing the proper root certificates that are used to sign the server certificates.

Using Wildcard Certificates

The Access Gateway supports validation of wildcard certificates for the Access Gateway Plug-in. The wildcard certificate has an asterisk (*) in the certificate name. Wildcard certificates can be formatted in one of two ways, such as *.[Link] or www*.[Link]. When a wildcard certificate is used, clients can choose different Web addresses, such as http:// [Link] or [Link] The use of a wildcard certificate allows several Web sites to be covered by a single certificate.

Configuring FIPS 140-2 on the Model 9000 FIPS Series

FIPS 140-2 is a standard issued by the United States National Institute of Standards and Technologies. FIPS 140-2 specifies the security requirements for a cryptographic module that is used within a security system that protects sensitive information in computer and telecommunication systems. The Access Gateway Model 9000 FIPS Series complies with the second version of this standard, FIPS140-2. Tasks in this section include: How FIPS 140-2 works Configuring a FIPS 140-2 Managing FIPS140-2 Keys Configuring a High Availability (HA) FIPS 140-2 System.

How FIPS 140-2 Works

The FIPS 140-2 is a cryptographic module that allows you to configure additional security on the Access Gateway. FIPS 140-2 is configured by creating two passwords and creating a FIPS key in the Hardware Security Module. The FIPS key is an RSA public-private key pair. The Hardware Security Module provides a secure location for storing the private key for the Access Gateway.

276

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

To configure the Access Gateway to use FIPS 140-2, a secure certificate signed by a Certificate Authority must be installed on the Access Gateway. If you do not have a signed certificate, create a Certificate Signing Request and send it to a public CA, such as Verisign or Thawte. Citrix recommends installing the signed certificate on the Access Gateway before configuring FIPS 140-2. For more information about certificates, see Installing and Managing Certificates on page 79. The private key is associated with a server certificate that is signed by a Certificate Authority (CA). You can install the private key in the Hardware Security Model using the FIPS wizard or using the configuration utility. Note: Only an administrator who logs on to the Access Gateway using nsroot (the administrative user name) can change the passwords and install the private key in the Hardware Security Module. The following table summarizes the differences between the Access Gateway and the FIPS 140- 2 appliance.
Setting Private key storage Cipher support Accessing private keys Access Gateway On the hard drive All ciphers From the hard drive FIPS 140-2 On the FIPS card FIPS-approved ciphers Not accessible

Configuring FIPS 140-2 is similar to configuring a non-FIPS appliance. However, the processes differ, due to the presence of the Hardware Security Model on the Access Gateway FIPS 140-2 appliance. After completing the basic settings on the Access Gateway, configure the Hardware Security Module.

Configuring the Hardware Security Module

When you configure the Hardware Security Module for the first time, it must be initialized. During initialization, you change the default passwords. The Hardware Security Module comes with two preconfigured passwords. These passwords are called the Security Officer password and the user password. The Security Officer password allows you to configure all services, and install and initialize the Hardware Security Module. The user password allows you to configure services only. The default values for the passwords are: Security Officer password - sopin123 User password - userpin123

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

277

Note: When changing the Security Officer password and the user password for the first time, specify sopin123 as the old Security Officer password. Citrix recommends changing the passwords on the Hardware Security Module before configuring the module. The Hardware Security Module can be configured only by the appliance administrator and should be configured before you run the FIPS 140-2 appliance for the first time. When you configure the Hardware Security Module for the first time, you configure the passwords. The initial configuration also erases all the existing data on the Hardware Security Module. Note: Due to security constraints, the passwords for the Hardware Security Module cannot be retrieved. Store a copy of the password safely. If you need to initialize the Hardware Security Module, you need to specify this password as the old Security Officer password.

To initialize the Hardware Security Module

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. Click Initialize HSM. In Security Officer (SO) Password, type a new password. In Old SO Password, type sopin123, which is the default password. In User Password, type userpin123, which is the default password. In HSM Label, type FIPS-140-2 Level-2 or a label of your choice and click OK.

Important: After the Hardware Security Module is initialized, save the Access Gateway configuration. If this is not done and the appliance is restarted, the FIPS 140-2 card will not function. Any subsequent attempt to change the Security Officer password locks the card.

278

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Creating Private Keys for FIPS

When the Hardware Security Module is configured, you need to create a FIPS 140-2 private key. This is an RSA key and is associated with a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA). The private keys are stored in the Hardware Security Module. To work with FIPS 140-2, the private key cannot be stored on the hard drive of the Access Gateway. You can create a private key using either the FIPS Wizard or the Configuration Wizard. The private key must be paired with a signed server certificate from a Certificate Authority. If you do not have a server certificate, you can create a Certificate Signing Request from with the FIPS Wizard. If you do have a signed certificate, Citrix recommends creating the private key using the configuration utility. The FIPS Wizard allows you to configure the following: Create a new private key or import an existing one Create a Certificate Signing Request Create the certificate Install the certificate

To start the FIPS Wizard

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. In the details pane, under SSL Certificates Overview, click FIPS wizard. Click Next and follow the directions in the wizard.

Note: If you do not have a signed certificate, use the Certificate Signing Request that is in the FIPS wizard. After creating the CSR, exit the wizard. When you receive the signed certificate back from the Certificate Authority, you can run the FIPS wizard again to install the certificate and the private key.

To create a FIPS 140-2 key using the configuration utility

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. In the details pane, on the FIPS Keys tab, click Add. In Fips Key Name, type the name of the key.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

279

4.

In Modulus, type 1024. The modulus is the key-bit length. Citrix recommends a modulus size of 1024.

5.

Under Exponent, select F4 and click Create.

The FIPS key is stored in the Hardware Security Module of the Access Gateway.

Exporting FIPS 140-2 Keys

You can export a private key to the hard drive of the Access Gateway. Private keys are exported for use in a high-availability pair or if you want to create a backup of the private key. Note: When configuring a high availability pair that uses FIPS 140-2, each Access Gateway must have the same private key and server certificate. Citrix recommends that you create a backup of any key created on the FIPS 140-2 Hardware Security Module.

To export a FIPS key

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. On the FIPS Keys tab, click Export. Under FIPS Key Name, select the key you want to export. In File Name, type the name of the file to be exported and click Export. The exported file is stored in the /nsconfig/ssl directory by default. If you choose to use any other directory, you must specify the complete path to the location. You can also click Browse to start the file explorer to navigate to any location on the Access Gateway.

Important: To avoid errors when importing a FIPS 140-2 key, when you export the key, make sure that the name of the exported key is the same as the original key name when it was created. If a private key on the Hardware Security Module is deleted, the associated server certificates cannot be used because the private key is associated with the server certificate. When the private key is deleted, you cannot create the same key a second time.

280

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Importing FIPS 140-2 Keys

You can transfer an existing server certificate and private key to the Access Gateway and the Hardware Security Module. For example, you have a certificate and private key on a Windows server that is running Internet Information Services (IIS). You export the certificate and private key from IIS and import it to the Access Gateway and then import the private key to the Hardware Security Module. You can use an existing FIPS 140-2 key with the Access Gateway. The existing FIPS 140-2 key needs to be imported into the Hardware Security Module.
To import a FIPS 140-2 key from the Access Gateway

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. On the FIPS Keys tab, click Import. Next to Import From, select FIPS key file. In FIPS Key Name, type the name of the FIPS 140-2 key to be created. In Key File Name, type the name of the FIPS 140-2 key to be imported and click Import. Note: The default location is the /nsconfig/ssl directory. If the file is located in another directory, you must specify the complete path to the location. You can use also click Browse to launch the file explorer and navigate to any location on the Access Gateway.

Importing External Keys

In addition to transferring FIPS 140-2 keys, you can also transfer external private keys from the hard drive to the Hardware Security Module. External keys are created outside the Hardware Security Module. To import an external key into the Hardware Security Module, you need to use an intermediate key, also known as a wrap key within the Hardware Security Module. You can use one wrap key to import multiple private keys.
To generate a wrap key

1. 2. 3.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. On the Wrap Keys tab, click Add. In Wrap Key Name, type the name of the wrap key.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

281

4. 5.

In Password, type the password to be used for the wrap key. In Salt, type the salt string to be used for the wrap key and click Create.

Converting the External Key into the PKCS8 Format

Before importing an external key, you first need to convert it to the PKCS8 format. The external key is encrypted with the wrap key before it is imported into the Hardware Security Module.
To convert the external key into the PKCS8 format

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. On the FIPS Keys tab, click Import. Next to Import From, click Pkcs8 file and click Convert. In Key Name (Pkcs8 format), click Browse and navigate to the private key. In Private Key Path, click Browse and navigate to the private key. Under Key Format, select the format to which the external key is saved. In Password, type the password used to encrypt the key, click Convert, and then click Import.

After converting the private key to the PKCS8 format, import the internal key to the Hardware Security Model.
To import an external private key as a FIPS key

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. On the FIPS Keys tab, click Import. Click Import From Pkcs8 file. In FIPS Key Name, type the name of the FIPS key to be created. In Key File Name, type the name of the FIPS key to be imported. Under Wrap Key Name, select the wrap key to be used for the import. In IV, type the initialization vector to be used for importing the key, such as wrapkey123, and click Create. Note: For security reasons, delete the external private key from the hard disk after you import it into the Hardware Security Module.

282

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Configuring High Availability with FIPS 140-2

In a high availability configuration, the private key is not propagated to the secondary Access Gateway appliance. After creating the private key on the primary appliance, it needs to be copied to the secondary appliance. The steps for transferring the private key are: Initializing the primary and secondary appliances Creating the FIPS private key on the primary appliance Exporting the server certificate and FIPS private key from the primary appliance Importing the server certificate and FIPS private key to the secondary appliance

This is also known as secure information management. If you have two Access Gateway appliances configured as a high availability pair, the same private key and server certificate must reside on each appliance. You can use the FIPS wizard to import certificates from an IIS server or from the primary Access Gateway appliance. During the wizard, select Import existing private key as FIPS key and then select the private key. Before running the FIPS wizard, create the wrap key that is used for importing private keys. Citrix recommends using the FIPS wizard to import the private key. You can also import the private key using the configuration utility.
To configure a high availability with FIPS 140-2 using the configuration utility

1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

In the configuration utility, in the Navigation pane, expand SSL and click FIPS. On the FIPS Info tab, click Enable SIM. In Certificate File Name, type the file name and path on the source system where the FIPS 140-2 certificate is stored. In Key Vector File Name, type the file name and path on the source system where the FIPS 140-2 key vector is stored. In Target Secret File Name, type the location for storing the secret data on the target system. In Source Secret File Name, type the location for storing the secret data on the target system and click OK.

Appendix A

Configuring Security Settings

283

Note: The secret file on the source and target system is the file on the system to which the FIPS key is copied before it is transferred or received.

284

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

A PPENDIX

Advanced Concepts

This appendix discusses some of the advanced settings you can configure on the Access Gateway. In This Appendix Configuring DNS Virtual Servers Using Operators and Operands in Policy Expressions Configuring Server-Initiated Connections Enabling Access Gateway Plug-in Logging

Configuring DNS Virtual Servers

To configure a DNS virtual server, you specify a name and IP address. Like the Access Gateway virtual server, an IP address must be assigned to the DNS virtual server. However, this IP address must be on the internal side of the targeted network so that all internal addresses are resolved properly by clients. The DNS port must also be specified.
To configure a DNS virtual server

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Virtual Servers and Services and click Virtual Servers. In the details pane, click Add. In Name, type a name for the virtual server. In IP Address, type the IP address of the DNS server. In Port, type the port on which the DNS server listens. In Protocol, select DNS and click Create.

286

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Finally, associate the DNS virtual server with the Access Gateway. There are two different methods by which this can be accomplished. The virtual server can either be tied globally to the Access Gateway or on a per virtual server basis, depending on the needs of your Access Gateway.

Resolving DNS Name Servers Located in the Secure Network

If your DNS server is located in the secure network behind a firewall and the firewall is blocking ICMP traffic, you cannot test connections to the server due to the request being blocked by the firewall. You can resolve this by creating a nondirectly addressable DNS virtual server on the Access Gateway, creating a DNS service with a custom DNS Monitor that resolves to a known FQDN and then binding the service to the virtual server. Configure a DNS virtual server and DNS service only if your DNS server is located behind a firewall. First, configure the DNS service and DNS Monitor and then create the DNS virtual server.
To configure a DNS service and DNS Monitor

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

In the configuration utility, in the navigation pane, expand Virtual Servers and Services and click Services. In the details pane, click Add. In Service Name, type a name for the service. In Protocol, select DNS. In Server, type the IP address of the DNS server. In Port, type the port number. On the Monitors tab, under Available, select dns, click Add, click Create and click Close.

Next, create the DNS virtual server using the procedure To configure a DNS virtual server on page 285 and bind the DNS service to the virtual server.
To bind a DNS service to a DNS virtual server

In the Configure Virtual Service (Load Balancing) dialog box, on the Services tab, select the DNS service, click Create and click Close.

Appendix B

Advanced Concepts

287

Using Operators and Operands in Policy Expressions

An operator identifies an operation an object performs on its operands. Some qualifiers limit which operators are available. The following table briefly describes each operator: .
Operator ==, !=, EQ, NEQ Description These operators test for exact matches. They are case-sensitive ([Link] is NOT EQUAL to [Link]). These operators are useful for creating permissions to allow particular strings that meet an exact syntax, but exclude other strings. This operator is used for numerical comparisons; it is used on the length of the URLs and query strings. These operators perform checks against the specified qualifier to determine if the specified string is contained in the qualifier. These operators are not case-sensitive. These operators check for the existence of particular qualifier. For example, these operators can be applied to HTTP headers to determine if a particular HTTP header exists or if the URL Query exists. This operator checks if the qualifier exists and if it has contents (that is, whether or not a header exists and has a value associated with it, no matter what the value).

GT CONTAINS, NOTCONTAINS EXISTs, NOTEXISTS

CONTENTS

Qualifier Method

Operator EQ/NEQ

Operand Required Standard HTTP Methods Supported methods GET, HEAD, POST, PUT, DELETE OPTIONS, TRACE, CONNECT

Action

Example

Verifies the Method EQ GET incoming request method to the configured method.

288

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Qualifier URL

Operator EQ/NEQ

Operand Required URL (Format: / [prefix][*][.suffix])

Action

Example

Verifies the URL EQ / foo*.asp incoming URL URL EQ /foo* with the configured URL. URL EQ /*.asp URL EQ /[Link]

CONTAINS/ Required NOTCONT Any String (in AINS Quotes)

URL CONTAINS Verifies the ZZZ incoming URL for the presence of the configured pattern. (Includes URL and URL query.)

URL LEN

GT

Required

Compares the incoming URL Length (as an integer length with the value) configured length. (Includes URL and URL query.)

URLLEN GT 60

URL QUERY

CONTAINS/ Required NOTCONT Any String (in AINS Quotes) Optional Length and offset

Verifies the incoming URL query for the presence of the configured pattern. Used similarly to CONTENTS. If no option is specified, the whole URL query after the pattern is used. If options are present, only the length of the query after the pattern is used. The offset is used to indicate from where to start the search for the pattern.

URLQUERY CONTAINS ZZZ

URL QUERY LEN

GT

Required

Compares the URLQUERYLN incoming URL GT 60 Length (as an integer query length with value) the configured length.

Appendix B

Advanced Concepts

289

Qualifier URL TOKENS

Operator EQ, NEQ

Operand Required URL Tokens (Supported URL Tokens =, +, %, !, &, ?)

Action Compares the incoming URL for the presence of configured tokens. A backward slash (\) must be entered in front of the question mark.

Example URLTOKENS EQ % , +, &, \?

VERSION

EQ, NEQ

Required Standard HTTP versions. (Valid http version strings HTTP/1.0, HTTP/1.1)

Compares the VERSION EQ incoming HTTP/1.1 requests HTTP version with the configured HTTP version. Examines the Header Cookie incoming request EXISTS for the presence of the HTTP header. Verifies the Header Cookie incoming request CONTAINS "&sid" for the presence of a configured pattern in the specific header. Used similarly to CONTENTS. If no option is specified, the whole HTTP header value after the pattern is used. If options are present, only the length of the header after the pattern is used. The offset is used to indicate from where to start the search for the pattern.

HEADER

EXISTS/ None NOTEXIST S

CONTAINS/ Required NOTCONT Any String (in AINS Quotes) Optional Length and offset

290

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Qualifier HEADER (Contd...)

Operator

Operand

Action

Example

CONTENTS Optional Length and offset

Uses the contents Header User-Agent CONTENTS of the HTTP header. If no option is specified, the whole HTTP header value is used. If options are present, only the length of the header starting from the offset is used.

SOURCEIP

EQ/NEQ

Required IPAddress Optional netmask

Verifies the source IP address in the incoming request against the configured IP address. If the optional netmask is specified, the incoming request is verified against the configured IP address and netmask. Verifies the destination IP address in the incoming request against the configured IP address. If the optional netmask is specified, the incoming request is verified against the configured IP address and netmask.

Sourceip EQ [Link] netmask [Link]

DESTIP

EQ/NEQ

Required IPAddress Optional netmask

Sourceip EQ [Link] netmask [Link]

SOURCEPORT

EQ/NEQ

Required Port Number Optional Port Range

Verifies the SOURCEPORT EQ source port 10-20 number in the incoming request against the configured port number.

Appendix B

Advanced Concepts

291

Qualifier DESTPORT

Operator EQ/NEQ

Operand Required Port Number Optional Port Range

Action

Example

DESTPORT NEQ Verifies the destination port 80 number in the incoming request against the configured port number. Checks the [Link] version of the ION EQ SSLV3 SSL/TLS version being used in the secure connection. [Link].T Checks for the type of the cipher YPE EQ EXPORT being used (export or nonexport). Checks for the key strength of the cipher being used. [Link].B ITS GE 40

[Link]

EQ/NEQ

Required SSL version

[Link]

EQ/NEQ

Required Client Cipher type

[Link]

EQ, NEQ, Required GE, LE, GT, Client Cipher bits LT EXISTS, NOTEXIST S

[Link]

Checks whether [Link] or not the client EXISTS sent a valid certificate during the SSL handshake. Checks the [Link] version of the SION EQ 2 client certificate. Checks the serial [Link] IALNUMBER EQ number of the client certificate. 2343323 The serial number is treated as a string. [Link] ALGO EQ md5WithRSAEncry ption [Link] JECT CONTAINS CN= NetScaler

[Link]

EQ, NEQ, Client Certificate GE, LE, GT, Version. LT Required Client Certificate Serial Number

[Link] EQ/NEQ

[Link]

EQ/NEQ

Required

Checks the signature Client Certificate algorithm used in Signature Algorithm the client certificate. Checks the subject field of the client certificate.

[Link]

CONTAINS, Required NOTCONT Client Certificate AINS Subject Optional Length, Offset

292

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Qualifier [Link]

Operator

Operand

Action

Example

CONTAINS, Required NOTCONT Client Certificate AINS Issuer Optional Length, Offset

Checks the issuer [Link] field of the client UER CONTAINS certificate. O=VeriSign

[Link]

EQ, NEQ, Required GE, LE, GT, Date. LT

Checks the date from which the client certificate is valid. Valid date formats are: Tue, 05 Nov 1994 [Link] GMT Tuesday, 05Nov-94 [Link] GMT Tue Nov 14 [Link] 1994

[Link] IDFROM GE Tue Nov 14 [Link] 1994

[Link]

EQ, NEQ, Required GE, LE, GT, Date. LT

Checks the date until which the client certificate is valid. Valid date formats are: Tue, 05 Nov 1994 [Link] GMT Tuesday, 05Nov-94 [Link] GMT Tue Nov 14 [Link] 1994

[Link] IDTO GE Tue Nov 14 [Link] 1994

Configuring Server-Initiated Connections

For each user logged on to the Access Gateway with IP addresses enabled, the DNS suffix is appended to the user name and a DNS address record is added to the appliances DNS cache. This helps in referencing users with a DNS name instead of remembering the IP addresses of the users.

Appendix B

Advanced Concepts

293

When an IP address is assigned to a users session, it is possible to connect to the users client device from the internal network. For example, users connecting with Remote Desktop or a VNC client can access the users client device for diagnosing a problem application. It is also possible for two remotely logged on Access Gateway users with internal network IP addresses to communicate with each other through the Access Gateway. Allowing discovery of the internal network IP addresses of the logged on users on the appliance aids in this communication. A remote user can use the ping command to discover the internal network IP address of a user who could be logged on to the Access Gateway at that time. The command for this is:
ping <[Link]>

A server can initiate a connection to a client in many different ways. These can either be TCP or UDP connections. The connections can originate from an external system in the internal network or from another computer logged on to the Access Gateway. The internal network IP address assigned to each client logged on to the Access Gateway is used for these connections. The different types of server-initiated connections that the Access Gateway supports are described below. For these types of connections, the server has prior knowledge about the clients IP address and port and makes a connection to it. This connection is intercepted by the Access Gateway. In these type of connections, the client makes an initial connection to the server and the server connects to the client on a port that is known or derived from the first configured port. In this scenario, the client device makes an initial connection to the server and then exchanges ports and IP addresses with the server using an applicationspecific protocol where this information is embedded. This enables the Access Gateway to support applications such as active FTP connections. The port command is used in an active FTP and certain Voice over IP protocols. The Access Gateway supports plug-in to plug-in connections through the use of the internal network IP addresses. With this type of connection, two Access Gateway clients that use the same Access Gateway can initiate connections with each other. An example of this is using instant messaging applications, such as Windows Live Messenger or Yahoo! Messenger. If a user logged on to the Access Gateway does not execute a clean logoff (the logoff request did not reach the appliance), the user can log on again using any device and replace the previous session with a new session. This feature might be beneficial in deployments where one IP address is appended per user.

294

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

When an inactive user logs on to the Access Gateway for the first time, a session is created and an IP address is assigned to the user. If the user logs off but the logoff request gets lost or the client fails to perform a clean logoff, the session is maintained on the system. If the user tries to log on again from the same device or another device, after successful authentication, a transfer logon dialog box is presented to the user. If the user chooses to transfer logon, the previous session on the Access Gateway is closed and a new session is created. The transfer of logon is active for only two minutes after logoff and if logon is attempted from multiple devices simultaneously, the last logon attempt is the one that replaces the original session.

Enabling Access Gateway Plug-in Logging

You can configure the Access Gateway Plug-in to log all errors to a text file. The Access Gateway Plug-in logs all of its major activities in to a log file. These are stored on the client device. Two files are created: hooklog<num>.txt [Link]

The hooklog<num>.txt file logs interception messages generated by the Access Gateway Plug-in and the [Link] file finds errors with the plug-in. You can also send these files to Citrix customer support for assistance. Note: The [Link] files are not deleted automatically. Citrix recommends deleting the files periodically. User logs are now located in the following directories in Windows: Windows XP (all users): %SystemDrive%:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Citrix\AGEE Windows XP (user-specific): %SystemDrive%:\Documents and Settings\%username%\Local Settings\Application Data\Citrix\AGEE Windows Vista (all users): %SystemDrive%:\ProgramData\Citrix\AGEE Windows Vista (user-specific): %SystemDrive%:\Users\%username%\AppData\Local\Citrix\AGEE

You can use these log files to troubleshoot the Access Gateway Plug-in. Users can email the log files to technical support if problems are encountered. In the Configuration dialog box, users can set the level of logging for the Access Gateway Plug-in. The logging levels are:

Appendix B

Advanced Concepts

295

Record error messages Record event messages Record Access Gateway Plug-in statistics Record all errors, event messages, and statistics

To enable logging

1. 2.

Right-click the Access Gateway icon in the notification area and click Configure Access Gateway. Click the Trace tab, select the log level, and click OK.

296

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Index

A
Accelerator Plug-in, see Citrix Repeater Plug-in access control list logging 259 Access Gateway 82 Access Gateway wizard 3637, 4546 administrator accounts 249 alerts 16 configuration settings 252 configuration testing 58 configuring primary for high availability 65 default IP address 55 deploying in DMZ 27, 38 deploying in double-hop DMZ 31 deploying in secure network 28 deploying with server farm 29 Education and Training 16 hardware platforms 22 installation 38, 44 installation prerequisites 34 installation, materials for 38 installing in DMZ 27, 33 IP address types 38 local users 114 logon page 114 Model 10010 22 Model 7000 22 Model 9000 22 MPX 5500 18, 22, 39 Published Applications Wizard 3637 reverse proxy 222 saving configuration 253 Setup Wizard 36, 45, 55 synchronizing 66 upgrading 247 Access Gateway Advanced Edition 90 Access Gateway Model 10010 23 Access Gateway Model 7000 23 Access Gateway Model 9000 23

Access Gateway Model 9000 with FIPS 140-2 23 Access Gateway Model 9010 23 Access Gateway MPX 5500 22 Access Gateway Plug-in 2021, 27, 31, 95 intranet applications 206 IPv6 54 TCP compression monitoring 109 TCP compression policy 105 using with firewalls 195 using with proxy server 195 using with Repeater Plug-in 189 Web Interface 168 Windows 159 with Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps 162 Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX 20, 9495, 159, 170 client choices 185 configuring on Access Gateway 171 system requirements 170 Access Gateway Plug-in for Java 20, 95, 159 client choices 185 configuring on Access Gateway 172 intranet applications 206, 208, 217 system requirements 172 Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows 9495 client choices 184 configuring on Access Gateway 171 Access Gateway Policy Manager authentication, configuring 118 creating virtual server 53 Access Gateway proxy binding to a virtual server 53 Access Gateway wizard 3637, 4546 authentication 113, 118 Certificate Signing Request 80 clientless access 174 IPv6 54 Access Interface 21, 95, 219 portal links 221

298

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

authentication 19, 34, 37 Access Gateway Policy Manager 118 Access Gateway wizard 113, 118 authorization 113 binding 112 binding policy 117, 119 binding to virtual server 53 cascading 137 certificates 266 client certificates 112, 133 client certificate, user name extraction 135 common access card 137 configuring 117 credential index 96 default global types 113 disabling 142 double-source 137, 139 evaluation order 117 external 114 Gemalto Protiva 113, 127, 131 LDAP attribute fields 121 LDAP attributes 124 LDAP group extraction 147 LDAP group extraction, multiple domains 152 LDAP ports 121 LDAP, single sign-on 205 LDAP, StartTLS 121 local 26, 114 locating bound policies 119 modifying 118 nested group extraction 18, 149 NTLM 131 policies 91 RADIUS IP address extraction 126 RADIUS protocols 126 RADIUS shared secret 126 RADIUS, guidelines 125 RADIUS, works with 113 removing 118 RSA SecurID 113, 127 SafeWord 113, 127, 130 setting priority 120, 138 smart card 136 supported types 26, 112 system IP address 56 TACACS+ 132

Access Scenario Fallback 183, 186 guidelines 188 quarantine group 186 accounting 19 Active Directory 112, 152 administrator accounts 249 administrator password 45 high availability 62 RPC node 64 alerts Knowledge Center 16 application time-out 98 asymmetric encryption 265 auditing policy 257258 binding to virtual server 53 audting session identifiers 18, 257

Index
authorization 19, 34, 37, 96, 144 authentication 113 client choices group 184 default global 144 groups 96 LDAP group attribute field 149 RADIUS group extraction 150 setting priorities 147 authorization group 235 configuring 236 authorization policy binding 146 auto negotiation 46

299

B
backup license 48 BGF 57 binding authentication policy 119 authorization policy 146 certificates 84 preauthentication policy 231 session policies 97 TCP compression policy 108 traffic policy 9899 virtual servers 53 binding policies 93 bookmarks binding to virtual server 53 Border Gateway Protocol 57 Branch Repeater 159

C
cascading authentication 137 CAs. See Certificate Authority Certificate Authority 25, 34, 46, 79, 267 configuration utility 80 private 270 public 270 subordinate 267 certificate management 34 Certificate Revocation Lists 269 Certificate Signing Request 46, 80, 82 creating 82 private key 81

certificates 266 authentication 266 binding to virtual server 84 client authentication 112 combining with private key 273 content 267 converting to PEM format 272 DER 79 DSA private key 81 exporting 87 fully qualified domain name 83 generating for multiple levels 273 hierarchy 267 imported, installing 88 importing 87 importing from Secure Gateway 87 installing 37, 83, 271 intermediate 80, 8485, 268 intermediate, installing 86 LDAP connections 140 management 80 password-protected 81 PEM 79 PFX 79 PKCS #12 79, 81 private 270 private key 81 private key, unencrypting 272 renewal 269 revocation lists 269 root 25, 7980, 84, 141, 266 RSA private key 81 self-signed 85 server 7980, 82, 84, 266 signed 46 subordinate 85, 268 test 46, 79 verification process 270 Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol 126, 151 CHAP, see Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol checklist pre-installation 62 ciphers description 264 Citrix Merchandising Server 18 Citrix NetScaler 91 Citrix Preferred Support Services 14 Citrix Presentation Server Clients, see Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps Citrix Receiver 18

300

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

clientless access 20, 37, 95, 159160, 176, 222 Access Gateway wizard 174 binding 177 binding to virtual server 53 SharePoint 37 URL encoding 96 command policies 249 command propagation disabling 68 high availability 68 verifying 69 common access card authentication 137 compound expressions 92 conditional policies 90 configuration testing Access Gateway 58 configuration file high availability 6263 configuration settings removing 254 saving 253 viewing 252 configuration utility 44 certificates 80 creating virtual server 53 using 45 configuring independent network computing 76 connections Access Gateway Plug-in and Citrix XenApp Plugin for Hosted Apps 162 Citrix XenApp 161 Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps 161 LDAP certificates 140 users 21 conventions documentation 13 cookies session 21 creating policies 93 credential index 96 cryptography 264 asymmetric encryption 265 public key 264 secret key 264 symmetric key 265 CSR, see Certificate Signing Request custom expressions 93, 228 custom home page 95, 221

Citrix Repeater Plug-in 159 Citrix Solutions Advisers 14 Citrix XenApp 26 Access Gateway Advanced Edition settings 90 configuring user connections 161 deploying 29 double-hop DMZ deployment 31 file type association 100 policy names 90 Published Applications Wizard 36 single sign-on 96, 205 split tunneling 214 Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps 27, 29, 31, 159 161 ICA proxy setting 96 IPv6 54 with Access Gateway Plug-in 162 client certificate authentication 112 two-factor 135 user name extraction 135 client certificates authentication 133 client choices 96, 181182 Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX 185 Access Gateway Plug-in for Java 185 authorization group 184 configuring options 184 quarantine groups 183 Secure Ticket Authority 185 client cleanup 96 client connections access method 168 configuring 171 ending sessions 21, 256 managing 255 multiple logon options 181 refreshing 256 session profile 95 time-out settings 199 types 20 viewing 256 client security 21 client security expressions 91 types 91 client software Access Gateway Plug-in for ActiveX 20 Access Gateway Plug-in for Java 20 Access Gateway Plug-in for Windows 20 Citrix XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps 20 client types 95

Index

301

D
Data Encryption Standard 81 dead intervals 66 debugging 96 default gateway 34, 39, 55 high availability 63 default gateway IP address 38 default global authentication types 113 delegated administrators 249 deployment authentication support 26 double-hop DMZ 31 secure network 28 single DMZ 29 Web Interface 2930 deployment options 26 DER certificates 79 DES, see Data Encryption Standard disabling authentication 142 DMZ deploying Access Gateway 27, 38 deploying double-hop 31 deploying Web Interface 30, 32 installation 33 single deployment 29 Web Interface, double-hop 31 DNS suffix IP pooling 213 DNS, see Name Service Providers documentation related 16 documentation conventions 13 documentation, product 14 domain single sign-on 205 double-hop binding to virtual server 53 double-hop DMZ deployment 31 double-source authentication 137, 139 DSA 81 DSA private key 81 dynamic routing 56

encryption asymmetric 265 public key 266 endpoint analysis 91, 223 expressions 227 MD5 checksum in process policy 240 policy types 223 SmartAccess 191 system requirements 224 exporting certificates 87 expressions client security 91, 238 client security, preauthentication 237 client security, types of 91 compound 92 compound client security 245 custom 93, 228 endpoint analysis 227 file policies 242 general 91 inline 92 multiple 230 named 92, 227 named, creating 92 network-based 91 operating system policies 241 policy 91 process policies 240 registry policies 242 service policies 239 simple 92 types 91 external authentication 114

F
failover high availability 62, 71 listen mode 72 failover interface set 77 Federal Information Processing Standard 23 Federal Information Processing Standard 140-2 17, 264 Access Gateway Model 9000 23 file shares single sign-on 202 file transfer system IP address 56 file transfer utility single sign-on 202 file type association 98, 100 requirements 100

E
Education and Training 16 email Web-based 95

302

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

high availability 61, 65, 7576 Access Gateway software version 62 adding node 63 administrator password 62 command propagation 68 configuration file 6263 configuring primary appliance 65 customizing 66 default gateway 63 disabling command propagation 68 disabling network interfaces 65 failover 62, 71 failover in listen mode 72 failover interface set 77 forcing primary 69 forcing secondary 70 forcing synchronization 67 health check 62 information needed 62 IP address 62 license 63 licenses 51 link redundancy 77 mapped IP address 63 maximum ID nodes 64 ports 62 pre-installation checklist 62 requirements 62 route monitors, adding 76 routed networks 74 RPC node password 63 synchronizing appliances 66 system IP address 62 troubleshooting 69 verifying command propagation 69 home page Access Interface 21, 95, 219, 221 custom 221 host name 4749 HTTP compression 98

filters 90 FIPS 140, see Federal Information Processing Standard firewall using with Access Gateway Plug-in 195 firewall ports 2728 FIS, see failover interface set flash disk 39 forced time-out 199200 FQDN, see fully qualified domain name FTP configuring for use with client 164 full duplex 46 fully qualified domain name 47

G
Gemalto Protiva 127, 131 authentication 113 general expressions 91 global user limit 143 group attribute field LDAP 149 group extraction LDAP 147 LDAP, multiple domains 152 RADIUS 150 group sessions 255 terminating 256 groups add users 116 authorization 96, 235 authorization, client choices 184 authorization, configuring 236 creating 115 deleting 116 quarantine 96, 234

H
half duplex 46 hardware platforms 22 health check high availability 62 heartbeat packets 75 hello intervals 66

I
ICA 3132 ICA proxy 96, 153, 191 IP address assignment 56 ICA session 159 ICSA 17 idle session time-out 200201 IEEE 802.11 support 33 IETF, see Internet Engineering Taskforce

Index
imported certificates installing 88 importing certificates 87 from Secure Gateway 87 Imprivata OneSign single sign-on 18 INC, see independent network configuration independent network computing configuring 76 independent network configuration 75 high availability 75 inline expressions 92 installation Access Gateway 38 certificates 83 firewall ports 2728 materials needed 38 MPX 5500 39 prerequisites 34 procedure for Access Gateway 44 secure network 28 single DMZ 27, 33 installing certificates 37 custom home page 221 interception mode 172173, 206 client choices 185 intranet applications 206 intermediate certificates 80, 8485 installing 86 Internet Engineering Taskforce 263 Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 Internet security protocols 263 intervals high availability 66 intranet applications 206 Access Gateway Plug-in 206 Access Gateway Plug-in for Java 206, 208, 217 binding to virtual server 53 intranet IP address, see IP pooling IP address 38 assigning 56 configuring using Setup Wizard 45 configuring using the Access Gateway wizard 45 46 default 55 default gateway 39, 55 high availability 62 mapped 39, 55, 95 private network 96 subnet 39, 5556 system 39, 55 virtual server 3839, 53 IP address extraction RADIUS 126 IP pooling 95, 208 binding to virtual server 53 DNS suffix 213 options 211 requirements 209 sessions 255 split tunneling 209 spoof IP address 213 terminating session 256 IPv6 54 ISO X.509 protocol 266

303

K
Knowledge Center 14 alerts 16

L
LAC, see License Authorization Code LDAP attribute fields 121 attributes, determining 124 ports 121 single sign-on 204 StartTLS 121 LDAP authentication 26, 112 certificates 140 group memberships 148 nested group extraction 18, 149 LDAP browser 124 LDAP group attribute field 149 LDAP group extraction 147 multiple domains 152

304

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

MPX 5500 18, 22, 39 MS-CHAP, see Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol multiple expressions 230

license backup 48 high availability 51, 63 installing 47 platform 4748 platform, downloading 48 platform, installing 48 universal 18, 47, 49 universal, downloading 49 universal, installing 51 user connections 34, 49 viewing 51 License Authorization Code 49 link redundancy 77 Linux 20 local authentication 26, 112, 114 local LAN access 96 local users 114 creating 58 groups 115 password 114 removing 115 logging 19, 257 access control list 259 session identifiers 18, 257 TCP connections 259 logon page Access Gateway 114 logon scripts 96

N
Name Service Providers 34, 37, 95, 215 configuring 58 IP address assignment 56 named expressions 92, 227 creating 92 NAS ID, see network access server identifier NAS IP, see network access server nested group extraction LDAP 18, 149 NetScaler 22, 91 network access server 125 network access server identifier 125 network interface disabling for high availability 65 link redundancy 77 network resources 20 network transmission 46 network-based expressions 91 [Link] high availability 62 NTLM authentication 26, 112, 131

M
Mac OS X 20 managing certificates 80 mapped IP address 3839, 55, 95 high availability 63 ICA proxy 56 Name Service Providers 56 materials for Access Gateway installation 38 maximum users 142 MD5 checksum 240 Merchandising Server 18 Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol 126, 151 Model 10010 22 rack installation 42 Model 7000 22 rack installation 41 Model 9000 22 rack installation 42

O
one-time password 127 Open Shortest Path First 57 OSPF 57 Outlook Web Access 95 OWA, see Outlook Web Access

P
PAP, see Password Authentication Protocol password administrator 45, 64 high availability, administrator 62 local users 114 one-time 127 RPC node 64 Password Authentication Protocol 126, 151 PEM certificates 79, 272 personal identification number 127 PFX certificates 79 PIN, see personal identification number PKCS #12 certificates 79

Index
PKI, see Public Key Infrastructure platform license 48 downloading 48 installing 48 policies 90 Access Gateway Advanced Edition settings 90 adding session profile 97 auditing 258 authentication 91 authentication priority 120 authentication types 112 authentication, binding 112 authentication, evaluation of 117 binding 90, 93 command 249 conditional 90 creating 93 description 89 endpoint analysis 91 expressions 91 post-authentication 223, 233 preauthentication 223 preauthentication, binding 231 priorities 90, 112 session 94 session, binding 97 session, creating 94 TCP compression 105 TCP compression, benefits 105 TCP compression, binding 108 TCP compression, creating 106 TCP compression, methods 106 traffic 98 traffic creating 98 traffic, binding 9899 traffic, HTTP compression 98 traffic, parameters 98 traffic, removing 100 policy filters 90 policy names Citrix XenApp 90 port redirection 37 portal links Access Interface 221 portal mode Web Interface 96 ports high availability 62 in DMZ 27 in secure network 28 LDAP 121 post-authentication policy 223, 233 Access Scenario Fallback 186 configuring 233 preauthentication policy 21, 223 binding 231 binding to virtual server 53 client security expression 237 profile 226 removing 232 precedence policies 90 pre-installation checklist 62 high availability 62 prerequisites installation 34 Presentation Server Clients, see XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps priorities 90 authentication, setting 138 authorization policy 147 private certificates 270 private key 81 combining with signed certificate 273 DSA 81 RSA 81 unencrypting 272 private network IP address 96 process policy MD5 checksum 240 product alerts 16 product documentation 14 profile description 89 preauthentication policy 226 session 95 session, adding to policy 97 session, creating 95 proxy reverse 222 proxy servers 198 settings 96 public Certificate Authority 270 public key encryption 266 Public Key Infrastructure 263 published applications 29 Published Applications Wizard 3637

305

306

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

Secure Gateway 17 importing certificates 87 SafeWord authentication 130 secure network deploying in 28 Secure Socket Layer 195, 263 Secure Ticket Authority 29, 185 binding to a virtual server 53 security Access Gateway 25 certificate management 25 security check 21 security concepts 263 security considerations 25 self-signed certificates 85 server certificate 7980, 84, 266 installation 271 server farm 29 deploying with Access Gateway 29 single sign-on 96, 205 service 14 session connections ending 21 session cookies 21 session identifiers auditing 18, 257 session policies group extraction from multiple domains 152 session policy 94 binding 97 binding to virtual server 53 creating 94 guidelines 94 session profile adding to policy 97 creating 95 session profiles 95 session time-out 200201 sessions license 34, 49 licenses for 51 maximum users 142 refresh 256 terminating 256 user 255 settings time-out 95 Setup Wizard 36, 45, 55 installing license 51 SFP, see Small Form-factor Pluggable Network Ports shared secret 126

Q
quarantine group 21, 96, 233234 Access Scenario Fallback 186 client choices 183 configuring 235

R
rack installation Model 10010 42 Model 7000 41 Model 9000 series 42 RADIUS authentication 26, 112 group extraction 150 guidelines 125 IP address extraction 126 protocols 126 shared secret 126 using SafeWord 130 works with 113 refresh session information 256 related documentation 16 remote access 17 removing local users 115 Repeater Plug-in 98 using with Access Gateway Plug-in 189 requirements high availability 62 reverse proxy 222 reverse split tunneling 214 RIP, see Routing Information Protocol root certificates 25, 7980, 84, 141, 266 route monitors adding 76 routed networks high availability 74 routes static 57 static and dynamic 56 Routing Information Protocol 57 RPC node administrator password 64 RSA 81 RSA private key 81 RSA SecurID authentication 26, 113, 127

S
SafeWord authentication 26, 113, 127, 130 configuration 130 supported products 130

Index
SharePoint clientless access 37 single sign-on 202 signed certificates 46 simple expressions 92 single sign-on 96, 98, 202 file transfer utility 202 Imprivata OneSign 18 to Citrix XenApp 205 to server farm 205 Web applications 98, 203 Web applications using LDAP 204 with Windows 96, 202 XenApp 96 Small Form-factor Pluggable Network Ports 43 smart card authentication 136 SmartAccess 17, 90, 159, 186, 190, 224, 233 endpoint analysis 191 SNMP 39 Softerra LDAP browser 124 software version for high availability 62 split DNS 96 split tunneling 95, 214 Citrix XenApp 214 IP pool 209 reverse 214 spoof intranet IP address 95, 213 SSL, see Secure Socket Layer StartTLS 121 static routes 5657 testing 57 STA, see Secure Ticket Authority subnet IP address 3839, 5556 ICA proxy 56 Name Service Providers 56 subordinate certificates 85 Subscription Advantage 15 support 14 symmetric network configuration 75 synchronizing appliances 66 forcing 67 system IP address 39, 55 authentication 56 file transfers 56 high availability 62 TCP compression policy 105 Access Gateway Plug-in 105 benefits 105 binding 108 creating 106 methods 106 monitoring 109 TCP connections logging 259 technical support 14 test certificates 46, 79 testing Access Gateway configuration 58 testing static routes 57 time-out application 98 forced 199200 idle session 200201 session 200201 time-out settings 95, 199 TLS, see Transport Layer Security traffic policies 98 traffic policy 98 binding 99 binding to virtual server 53 creating 98 HTTP compression 98 parameter 98 removing 100 Transfer Login page 212 Transport Layer Security 195, 263 triple DES, see Data Encryption Standard troubleshooting high availability 69 two-factor client certificate authentication 135

307

U
universal license 18, 49 downloading 49 installing 51 upgrading Access Gateway software 247 URL encoding clientless access 96 user connections 21 Access Gateway Plug-in 162 Citrix XenApp 161 license 34, 49 licenses for 51

T
TACACS+ authentication 26, 112, 132

308

Access Gateway Enterprise Edition Administrators Guide

WINS, see Name Service Providers

user groups users 115 user limit virtual server 143 user name extraction 135 user principal name 204 user sessions 255 terminating 256 users add to groups 116 local 114 maximum sessions 142

X
XenApp 2627 Access Gateway Advanced Edition settings 90 deploying 29 file type association 100 policy names 90 Published Applications Wizard 36 single sign-on 96 XenApp Plug-in for Hosted Apps 27, 29, 31, 159161 ICA proxy setting 96 XML Service Secure Ticket Authority 32 X.509 standard 85, 267

V
VeriSign, see Certificate Authority, public virtual server 19 binding 53 binding certificates 84 configuring 37 creating 53 IP address 3839, 53 IPv6 54 Secure Ticket Authority 185 user limit 143 Voice over IP 216 spoof IP address 213

W
WANScaler 189 WANScaler client, see Citrix Repeater Plug-in Web applications single sign-on 98, 202203 Web browser logging on to configuration utility 44 Web Interface 26 Access Scenario Fallback 160, 186 address 96 client choices 184185 deployment 29 deployment in DMZ, behind Access Gateway 30 deployment in DMZ, parallel to Access Gateway 30, 32 deployment in secure network 30 double-hop DMZ 31 portal mode 96 single sign-on 202 Windows Citrix Receiver 18 single sign-on 96, 202 Windows NT Lan Manager, see NTLM